tceng data-management student guide v9

564
Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management Student Guide Student Guide April 2004 MT14330 – Version 9.0 Publication Number MT14330

Upload: lam-nguyen

Post on 06-Apr-2015

834 views

Category:

Documents


1 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Teamcenter EngineeringProduct Data Management

Student Guide

Student GuideApril 2004

MT14330 – Version 9.0

Publication NumberMT14330

Page 2: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Manual History

ManualRevision

SoftwareVersion

PublicationDate

A Teamcenter Engineering V9.0;Unigraphics NX 2

April 2004

This edition obsoletes all previous editions.

© UGS PLM SolutionsAll rights reserved.Printed in the United States of America.

2 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management MT14330

Page 3: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Proprietary and Restricted Rights Notices

The following proprietary and restricted rights notices apply.

© 2004 UGS PLM Solutions Inc. All Rights Reserved. This softwareand related documentation are proprietary to UGS PLM Solutions Inc.LIMITATIONS TO U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS. UNPUBLISHED- RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER THE COPYRIGHT LAWS OF THEUNITED STATES. This computer software and related computer softwaredocumentation have been developed exclusively at private expense and areprovided subject to the following rights: If this computer software andcomputer software documentation qualify as "commercial items" (as thatterm is defined in FAR 2.101), their use, duplication or disclosure by theU.S. Government is subject to the protections and restrictions as set forthin the UGS PLM Solutions Inc. commercial license for the software and/ordocumentation, as prescribed in FAR 12.212 and FAR 27.405(b)(2)(i) (forcivilian agencies) and in DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and DFARS 227.7202-3(a)(for the Department of Defense), or any successor or similar regulation, asapplicable or as amended from time to time. If this computer software andcomputer documentation do not qualify as "commercial items," then they are"restricted computer software" and are provided with "restrictive rights," andtheir use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to theprotections and restrictions as set forth in FAR 27.404(b) and FAR 52-227-14(for civilian agencies), and DFARS 227.7203-5(c) and DFARS 252.227-7014(for the Department of Defense), or any successor or similar regulation, asapplicable or as amended from time to time. UGS PLM Solutions Inc., 5400Legacy Drive, Plano, Texas 75024. All trademarks belong to their respectiveholders.

MT14330 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3

Page 4: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9
Page 5: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Contents

Course Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Course Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Course Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Key Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Participants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Student Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Activity Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Activity: Login to Teamcenter Engineering (this is just an

example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12What is PDM? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

CAD Integration - Creating New Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

What is NX Manager Unigraphics? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Unigraphics NX Window in NX Manager Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Menu Bar — Pull-Down Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4What is Unigraphics NX? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5The Gateway Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Unigraphics NX in Native vs. NX Manager mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7NX Manager Unigraphics Part Selection dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Activity: Navigate the Part Selection dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Activity: Create a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Using NX Manager Unigraphics On-line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18What is Concurrent Engineering? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

What is the Master Model Approach? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Creating a New Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Storing Database Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Activity: Creating New Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Find by Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40Creating Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42

Activity: Creating an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45Creating Non-Master Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

Activity: Create a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Using Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5

Page 6: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Contents

Save As to Create a New Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Activity: Save As to Create New Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Activity: Save As to Create a new Part Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

SaveAs Non-Master Part Files dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Activity: Save As that includes Non-Master Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Starting the Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Teamcenter Engineering Application Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Activity: Starting Teamcenter Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Application Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Selecting Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Logging Out of Teamcenter Engineering (Portal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12My Navigator Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Portal Lite for NX Manager Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Folder Object Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

My Navigator Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Group and Role Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Activity: My Navigator Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Modifying Properties Columns in My Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Activity: Modifying Properties Columns in Navigator . . . . . . . . . 3-27Using Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Working with Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

What are Folders? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33Home, Newstuff and Mailbox Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34Folder Object Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35Creating Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Renaming Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37Moving Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37Deleting Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38Printing Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Performing a General Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39Activity: Finding and Working with Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45Activity: Test your Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Referencing Database Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52Using Cut, Copy, Paste, and Append . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53

Activity: Modifying Object References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55Activity: Test Your Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58

Finding and Viewing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

What are Items? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2What are Item Types? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Finding Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

6 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 7: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Contents

Viewing Objects from the Search Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Viewing Objects From your Home Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Activity: Finding Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Comparing Search Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Activity: Comparing Search Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Viewing the Contents of Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Item Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Item Revision Release Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Item Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Activity: Setting the Item Display Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Item Revision Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Activity: Viewing Item, Form, and File (Dataset) Data . . . . . . . . 4-29Activity: Test Your Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33Activity: Generating a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

User Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Creating Items from Teamcenter Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Activity: Create an Item in My Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Populating the Item With Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Activity: Populate the Item Revision Master Forms . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

What is a Dataset? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Item and Item Revision Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Activity: Create Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Dataset Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Activity: Modify the Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Dataset Files (Named References) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Dataset Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Activity: Open an Earlier Version of a Text Dataset . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Changing Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Item Save As and Revise from Teamcenter Engineering . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Activity: Performing a Save As and Revise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management . . . . . . . . 6-1

Creating 3D Visualization Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Activity: Creating 3D Visualization Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Using Part Export Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5How NX Manager Unigraphics stores Dependent Files . . . . . . . . 6-6

Dataset Files (Named References) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Activity: Creating 2D Visualization Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Activity: Creating Dependent Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7

Page 8: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Contents

Dataset Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16Activity: Open an Earlier Version of a Part Dataset . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

Protecting Data Using Check-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22Activity: Perform Explicit Check-Out for Unigraphics NX

Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24Activity: Perform Implicit Check-Out of Unigraphics NX Data . . 6-28

Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

Viewing Product Structure with PSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

What is Product Structure Editor (PSE)? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2The BOM View Revision Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3BOM View Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Launching PSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5PSE Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Modifying Columns in PSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Printing the BOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Activity: Viewing Product Structure in PSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Release Status Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Revision Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Activity: Changing a Revision Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Item Data Consumption While BOM Browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

Activity: Viewing Item Data from PSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24Opening Multiple Product Structures in PSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

Activity: Viewing Types of Product Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30Activity: Test Your Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Product Structure - CAD View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Review of Release Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Configuring using Revision Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Load Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Activity: Configuring using Revision Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Where Used and Where Referenced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Performing a Where Referenced Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Activity: Perform a Where Referenced Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Performing a Where Used Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Activity: Perform a Where Used Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Product Structure - Create/Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Building Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Activity: Create Assembly Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Activity: Complete Product Structure for Skate Line . . . . . . . . 10-17

8 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 9: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Contents

Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Product Structure - Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Introduction to Variant Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2Example of Variant Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3Creating Variant Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4Variant Data Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Activity: Add Options to Recreational Skate Line . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9Setting and Saving a Variant Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18Saving Variant Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19

Activity: Setting and Saving a Variant Configuration . . . . . . . . 11-20How does PSE work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26BOM Views and BOM View Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27PSE Multiple Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28

Activity: Creating Multiple BOMView Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29Alternate Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32

Activity: Add Alternate Fixture to the Assembly View . . . . . . . 11-33Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36

Workflow -View and Initiate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Overview of Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2States of Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3Initiating a Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4How do I know I have a Task to Perform? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5Working with the Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6Selecting the Sign-off Team . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7Check-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10

Activity: Initiating the Workflow Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11Activity: Submitting Data for Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Task View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2Process View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5Performing a Review Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Activity: Product Engineer Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8How do you Follow a Process after it leaves your Inbox? . . . . . . . . 13-13

Activity: Engineering Analyst Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16Using Resource Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21Delegating Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22Out of Office Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24Automated Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25

Activity: Manufacturing Engineering Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 9

Page 10: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Contents

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization . . . . . . . . 14-1

Where is the Visualization Data? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Activity: Locate and View Visualization Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Creating Markup Data from 3D Visualization Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7Activity: Creating a Markup From a 3D Image . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11

Creating Markup Data from 2D Visualization Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15Activity: Creating a Markup From a 2D Image . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18

Procedural Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24

Change Management - View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

What is Change Management? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2What is a Change Object? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3Types of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4Finding Existing Change Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6Change Object Folder Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7Launching CM Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8Working in the CM Viewer Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9CM Viewer - Viewer Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10CM Viewer - Properties Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11CM Viewer - Process Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12CM Viewer - Referencers Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13CM Viewer - BOM Changes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15CM Viewer - Effectivity Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16

Activity: Finding/Interrogating Change objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18What is Supercedure? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26

Activity: Viewing Supercedure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-29Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-32

Change Management - Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Activity: Find and Examine existing Wheel Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2Activity: Create New Spacer and Wheel Assy Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6Creating a Change Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15Activity: Creating a Change Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18Activity: Select the Signoff Team for CCB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-28Activity: Perform Tasks for CCB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-31What are Supercedures? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-35Activity: Finalize the Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-37Activity: Perform Signoff for CCB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-47Activity: Review Data Created From Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-52Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-57

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

10 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 11: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Course Overview

Course Description

Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management (PDM) demonstrateshow to use Teamcenter Engineering to create, revise, and manage data inthe PDM system.

Course Objectives

The objectives of this course are to teach you how to:

• Create and manage Teamcenter Engineering integrated CAD data.

• Effectively use the Teamcenter Engineering Portal interface.

• Create and use various types of database objects.

• Differentiate between working, in-process and released data.

• Electronically disposition (approve/reject) data.

• Monitor the release process prior to and following your involvement.

• Propose, control and approve product data changes using the ChangeManagement application.

Key Benefits

The key benefits of this course include the following:

• increased productivity by learning through realistic projects

• hands-on work sessions to practice using Teamcenter Engineering andNX Manager Unigraphics

• personal assistance from a certified instructor

• demonstrations of best practices for implementing and using TeamcenterEngineering

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11

Page 12: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Participants

Participants

Teamcenter Engineering users involved in consuming, reviewing, andauthoring data. This course teaches those tasks using the Portal interface.

Student Responsibilities

Student responsibilities to help you get the most out of this course includethe following:

• Be on time.

• Participate in class.

• Stay with the subject matter.

• Listen attentively and take notes.

• Practice, on the job, what you have learned.

• Have fun.

How to Use This Manual

Inside each lesson are sections that include key concepts followed by anactivity to allow you to practice the concepts.

The format of the activities is consistent throughout this manual. Steps arelabeled and specify what will be accomplished at any given point in theactivity. Below each step are action boxes which emphasize the individualactions that must be taken to accomplish the step.

Activity Example

For your benefit, each activity is organized in the following manner.

Activity: Login to Teamcenter Engineering (this is just an example)

In this activity, you will login to Teamcenter Engineering.

Step 1: Login to Teamcenter Engineering.

Start Teamcenter Engineering by ... (Actions)

Enter your ...

The Step is intended to be an increment to complete the activity.

12 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 13: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Course Overview

Indented from each step are a series of actions (appearing like a squarebullet). These actions are intended to provide the button pushes to completethe step. As you get better with Teamcenter Engineering, carefully try to dothe activity by using the steps alone.

Summary Page

Each lesson ends with a Summary page providing an overview list of thetopics that were taught in the lesson.

What is PDM?

Product Data Management (PDM) is a tool that helps manage all theprocesses, applications, and information required to design, manufacture,and support a product throughout its life cycle.

The goal of a PDM system is to provide a single, common interface formanaging and accessing all data within an organization.

PDM systems interface with Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems,such as SAP. With PDM, ERP systems and the web interface, you have all theingredients for a true collaborative environment.

PDM Benefits

Following are some benefits of the Teamcenter Engineering PDM system:

• helps reduce duplicate data which reduces storage requirements

• simplifies finding data and distributing data to those who need it

• allows quick, lightweight viewing of models, which is especially useful forverification when reviewing changes

• provides revision control and assurance of latest data

• manages assemblies and relationships between parts

• easily builds and modifies Bills of Material (BOM)

• maintains history of a product’s development evolution

• establishes relationships between requirements, specifications, and parts

• provides access control and vaulting to assure integrity of data

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 13

Page 14: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9
Page 15: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Lesson

1 CAD Integration - CreatingNew Data

Purpose

The purpose of this lesson is to use Unigraphics NX in NX Manager modeto create piece parts and an assembly. You will also learn how to create anon-master part file from master geometry.

Objective

The objective of this lesson is to teach you how to perform the following tasks:

• Start Unigraphics NX in NX Manager mode.

• Identify areas of the Unigraphics NX Interface.

• Navigate the NX Manager Unigraphics Part Selection dialog.

• Create Folders from the Unigraphics NX interface.

• Use the NX Manager Unigraphics online Help.

• Organize data using the Unigraphics NX Master Model approach.

• Create Piece Parts.

• Create an Assembly.

• Create a Non-master Part File from Master Geometry.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-1

Page 16: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

What is NX Manager Unigraphics?

NX Manager Unigraphics is a data management tool used in conjunctionwith Unigraphics NX. When Unigraphics NX is used in NX Manager mode,Teamcenter Engineering is running at the same time as a separate process.Since the two programs communicate, you can create, store, and access yourdata within a Teamcenter Engineering database.

NX Manager Unigraphics combines the power of Unigraphics NX in modelingand generating data from geometric shapes, with the power of TeamcenterEngineering in storing and retrieving data in a controlled fashion.

The integration of Unigraphics NX and Teamcenter Engineering providesthe following capabilities:

• management of Unigraphics NX parts and related files

• improved access control for data over operating system capabilities

• ability to easily revise Unigraphics NX parts, and keep all revisionsof a part together

• convenient organization of data into user-defined folders

• manual and automatic check-out and check-in

• ability to easily locate stored data

• tools to facilitate workgroup and enterprise collaboration

1-2 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 17: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Unigraphics NX Window in NX Manager Mode

The following graphic shows the Unigraphics NX window in the NX Managermode:

The numbers on the graphic call out the various areas of the interface whichare described below:

1. Menu bar: The menu bar is located along the top of the window. Themenus listed along the menu bar are used to access Unigraphics NXfunctionality. Left-click a menu to display a pull-down menu of availableoptions.

2. Tool bar: Tools bars surround the graphics area of the UnigraphicsNX window. The tool bar provids quick access to commonly used menuoptions.

3. Graphics area: The graphics area is used to create, view, and modifyparts, assemblies, tool paths, and other geometry data using UnigraphicsNX.

4. Cue line: The Cue line appears at the bottom left portion of the window.The purpose of the Cue line is to prompt for user interaction.

5. Status line: The Status line appears at the bottom right portion of thewindow. The purpose of the Status line is to give the user visual feedbackabout system activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-3

Page 18: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Menu Bar — Pull-Down Menus

The menu bar offers a number of options from which to choose. These optionshave pull-down menus associated with them that allow access to areasof functionality.

1. Pull-down menu: Holding the first mouse button down over a menu baroption causes the pull-down menu to display.

2. Cascade menu: Arrows to the right of the pull-down listing indicate thatfurther cascading options are available.

1-4 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 19: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

What is Unigraphics NX?

Unigraphics NX is an interactive Computer-Aided Design andComputer-Aided Manufacturing (CAD/CAM) system. The CAD functionsautomate the normal engineering, design, and drafting capabilities foundin today’s manufacturing companies. The CAM functions provide NCprogramming for modern machine tools using the Unigraphics NX designmodel to describe the finished part.

Unigraphics NX functions are divided into applications of commoncapabilities. These applications are supported by a prerequisite applicationcalled Gateway. Every Unigraphics NX user must have Unigraphics NXGateway; however, the other applications are optional and may be configuredto meet the needs of each individual user.

Unigraphics NX is a fully three-dimensional, double precision system thatallows you to accurately describe almost any geometric shape. By combiningthese shapes, you can design, analyze, and create drawings of your products.

Once the design is complete, the Manufacturing application allows you toselect the geometry describing the part, enter manufacturing informationsuch as cutter diameter, and automatically generate a cutter location sourcefile (CLSF), which can be used to drive most NC machines.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-5

Page 20: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

The Gateway Application

Gateway is the prerequisite for all other interactive applications, and is thefirst application you enter when you open Unigraphics NX. You can returnto Gateway at any time from the other applications in Unigraphics NX byselecting it from the Application pull-down menu.

Gateway allows you to open existing part files, create new part files, save partfiles, plot drawings and screen layouts, import and export various types offiles, and other general functions. It also provides consolidated view displayoperations, screen layout and layer functions, Work Coordinate System (WCS)manipulation, object information and analysis, and access to online help.

1-6 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 21: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Unigraphics NX in Native vs. NX Manager mode

The dialogs that display while running NX Manager Unigraphics are similarin appearance to the standard Unigraphics NX dialogs. The main differenceis that instead of working with operating system files (through the FileSelection dialog in Unigraphics NX), NX Manager Unigraphics allows you toselect parts by their part number and revision (through the Part Selectiondialog). This capability is possible since the part number and revision areboth stored in the database.

Following are some advantages of using Unigraphics NX in NX Managermode over Unigraphics NX in Native mode:

• You do not have to worry about specifying directories in the pathnamefor your parts. NX Manager Unigraphics organizes and finds the partsfor you.

• You can create, access and modify part files directly in the database.

• You can supply configuration rules when loading assemblies to determinewhich revisions of component parts are loaded from the database (usingLoad Options).

• Related files like drawings and manufacturing files can be organized withthe master geometry so that they are easy to find and manage.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-7

Page 22: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

NX Manager Unigraphics Part Selection dialog

In the next few pages you will be introduced to some of the elements andfunctions of the Part Selection dialog.

File→New

Choosing File→New or the New icon on the Unigraphics NX menu bar,displays the New Part File dialog.

1-8 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 23: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Key Points

Following are some key points on using the dialog windows:

• The Title reflects the function that you have chosen.

• The Folder Tree allows you to view the contents of your Home folder.

• You can sort the columns by clicking on the column header. The columnswill sort in ascending and descending order. You can resize the columnsby dragging a column sash left or right.

• The Paste Teamcenter Engineering Object button, , allows youto paste an Item Revision from the clipboard in the Portal interfacedirectly into the Part Selection dialog. This function is particularly usefulcombined with the Search functionality in My Navigator.

• You can find parts by using a partial Part Number and wildcard.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-9

Page 24: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

File→Open

Choosing File→Open or the Open icon on the Unigraphics NX menubar, displays the Open Part File dialog.

Key Points

Following are key points describing the Open Part File dialog window:

• A single mouse click on an Item highlights the revision and fills in thePart Number and Part Revision fields.

• You can also manually type in values for Part Number and Part Revision.

• You can use a wildcard search to find a part.

1-10 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 25: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Activity: Navigate the Part Selection dialog

In this activity, you will start Unigraphics NX in NX Manager mode andnavigate through the Part Selection dialog.

Step 1: Start Teamcenter Engineering Portal.

Your instructor will give you specific instructions forlaunching Portal.

Upon launching Portal, the Default Application window appears.

Step 2: Log on to the Portal application.

Click My Navigator in the Application Manager.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-11

Page 26: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

The first time you select an Application from the ApplicationManager, you will be presented with the log on dialog.

Step 3: Enter your User ID and Password.

Enter your User ID and Password in the log on dialog andclick the Login button.

1-12 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 27: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

The Portal application appears.

Step 4: Start Unigraphics NX in NX Manager mode.

If necessary, use the CTRL key to de-select your Home folder.

Click the Start/Open in UG icon .

Important! Before choosing the Start/Open in UG icon, makesure the Home folder is not selected. If your Home folder isselected, you will see the following message.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-13

Page 28: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Step 5: Familiarize yourself with the Part Selection dialog.

From Unigraphics NX, choose File→New... or click on the

New icon .

Collapse and expand the Home folder.

Choose Cancel.

Choose File→Open or click one time on the Open icon .

What folders are contained in the Open Part File dialog?

____________________________________________________

____________________________________________________

Use the Sash to change the size of the columns.

Choose Cancel.

This concludes the activity.

1-14 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 29: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Folders

Folders are a flexible way to organize your product information. An objectfolder can contain other objects and/or other folders. Below is a typical FolderTree you will see when the Part Selection dialog is opened.

Key Points

Following are some key points for working in folders:

• You can organize your work by creating folders.

• A folder is basically a container in which you can put things.

• Every folder has a name. Folder names are not unique.

• Some folders are company specific and others are your own personalorganization tools.

• Folders can be nested to practically any extent desired.

• – indicates an expanded folder; + indicates a collapsed folder.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-15

Page 30: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Creating Folders

You can create a new folder from within the New Part File dialog if you havewrite access to the selected folder. You can also create a new folder fromwithin the Open Part File dialog. To create a new folder, right-click over anexisting folder in the Folder Tree list. Select New Folder to create a newfolder, or Rename to rename the existing folder.

You cannot delete a folder from Unigraphics NX. You must use theTeamcenter Engineering My Navigator application to delete folders.

Default Container

Initially, the default folder is your Home folder. To change the default folder,right-click over the folder you want to be the new default container andchoose Make Default Container. The new default folder will remain in effectuntil another default folder is chosen.

You can also double-click on a folder to make it the new defaultcontainer.

1-16 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 31: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Activity: Create a Folder

In this activity, you will create a folder to organize your parts.

Step 1: Create a My Parts folder.

Choose File→New... or click the New icon .

Right-click over your Home folder and select New Folder.

The new folder is placed in your Home folder and the Namefield is highlighted.

Type in My Parts in place of New Folder and press the ENTERkey for the name to be accepted.

You can also right-click a folder object to Rename it.

Choose Cancel on the New Part File dialog.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-17

Page 32: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Using NX Manager Unigraphics On-line Help

NX Manager Unigraphics provides an extensive online help system. ChoosingHelp→Documentation... from the Unigraphics NX menu bar displays thefollowing menu.

Expand the Other book to list the NX Manager Unigraphics help files.

To locate documentation on specific topics of interest, you can access the

search functionality by choosing the Search icon .

1-18 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 33: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

What is Concurrent Engineering?

The goal of a PDM system is to facilitate the communication between groupsand to move away from the serial approach to data exchange. The mostefficient method of designing products is through the use of concurrentengineering techniques.

Concurrent engineering means that members of a team work on differentparts of a single shared product definition model at the same time.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-19

Page 34: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

What is the Master Model Approach?

The Master Model approach enables a company to separate the derived datafor a part from the basic geometric definition of the part.

For example, drawing and manufacturing data is separated from the basicgeometric definition of a part. The idea is to create a separate "non-masterpart file" belonging to the part revision and then include the master part fileas a component in it. This allows drawings or manufacturing data to becreated in the non-master part file.

The Master Model approach provides a number of benefits, including:

• Support for concurrent engineering, because the data for differentdisciplines is separated and more than one engineer can work on itsimultaneously.

• The non-master data always contains the latest master definition.

• The master definition of the part is less cluttered with documentationdata, so it is smaller and uses less memory when fully loaded.

• It is possible to apply separate access controls so that the masterdefinition for a part is protected while allowing other data (for example,drawings) to be worked on.

1-20 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 35: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Creating a New Part

You can choose the New icon from the Unigraphics NX toolbar to create a newmaster or non-master part. This option displays the New Part File dialog.

When you create a new part, it will go in your default container.

You can choose a Part Type for your new part file. Standards set up by yourcompany will affect what you use for Part Type.

You can use the Assign buttons in the Part Selection dialog to automaticallygenerate a new Part Number, Part Revision, and Part File Name (fornon-master part files).

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-21

Page 36: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Naming Conventions

Standards set up by the company or project will affect naming conventions.Contact the system administrator for specific information on the number andtypes of characters for a valid file name.

• Part Numbers must be unique in the database

• Part Number/Revision must be unique in the database

There is a maximum length for the following values:

• Part Number limit 26 characters

• Revision limit 32 characters

• Dataset Name limit 32 characters

In addition, the combined (Part Number+Revision+Dataset Name) lengthmust not exceed 50 characters.

Seed Part

A Seed Part is a part file that is used as the basis for a new part. The SeedPart button provides you with access to a list of Seed Parts. Your SystemAdministrator controls which Seed Parts are available on this menu.

1-22 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 37: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Storing Database Attributes

NX Manager Unigraphics enables you to store and access TeamcenterEngineering database attributes in Unigraphics NX part files. These arespecial part attributes, which synchronize automatically with propertiesin the Teamcenter Engineering database. Your system administrator canconfigure the set of available database attributes and their mappings toTeamcenter Engineering properties. NX Manager Unigraphics always keepsthe following part attributes synchronized between Unigraphics NX and theTeamcenter Engineering database:

• Part Name and Description

• Part Number

• Part Revision

• Part Type

• Unit of Measure

If you modify a database attribute in the Teamcenter Engineering database,then the database attribute in the part file will update when the part file isloaded into a Unigraphics NX session. If the value of a database attribute ischanged in the part file, then the property in the Teamcenter Engineeringdatabase will update when saved.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-23

Page 38: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

When creating a new part, you will be presented with the Edit DatabaseAttributes dialog which allows you to specify or change database attributes.Highlight the desired attribute, enter the new value in the Value field andpress the ENTER key.

Your DBA can add additional attributes to this list. For example, inthe Training environment, Assemb No, Creator and Materialwere added.

1-24 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 39: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Activity: Creating New Parts

Step 1: Create a new part file.

Choose File→New... or choose the New icon.

The New Part dialog appears.

Double-click your My Parts folder.

Double-clicking the My Parts folder makes it yourdefault container. All parts save from this point onwill reside in the My Parts folder until you identify anew default container.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-25

Page 40: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Leave the Part Type set to Item.

Enter the Part Number of 5004_###, where ### represents anumber that will be designated by your instructor.

Enter 000 for Part Revision.

Leave the Part File Type set to master.

Be sure that the Seed Part setting is Inch.

Choose OK.

The Edit Database Attributes dialog displays.

Highlight the Part Name line. In the Value field type the nameSpacer and press the ENTER key.

Highlight the Part Description line. In the Value field typeProject Caster Assy and press the ENTER key.

1-26 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 41: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Choose OK.

The border of the Graphics Window provides you withinformation including the Part Number and Revision.

Step 2: Enter the Modeling application from the Unigraphics NX menubar.

Choose Application→Modeling...

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-27

Page 42: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

To see a Trimetric view of the part, choose the Trimetric icon

.

Step 3: Create the Spacer (a Cylinder with a Hole).

Choose the Cylinder icon (or Insert→FormFeature→Cylinder).

1-28 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 43: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

The Cylinder dialog appears.

Select the Diameter, Height option.

The Vector Constructor dialog appears.

Choose the ZC Axis for the orientation of your part.

An arrow appears on the screen in the ZC direction.

The Cylinder dialog appears.

Change the Diameter to 1.25 and the Height to .3125.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-29

Page 44: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Choose OK.

The Point Constructor dialog appears.

Verify a base point of XC=0, YC=0 and ZC=0 and choose OK. Ifnot, choose Reset and then choose OK.

The cylinder appears on the screen.

Choose Cancel on the Vector Constructor dialog.

Right-click in the graphics window and choose the Fit icon

.

1-30 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 45: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Step 4: Create a Hole in the Cylinder.

Refer to the Cue line to help you through the functionalsteps.

Choose the Hole icon (or choose Insert→FormFeature→Hole...).

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-31

Page 46: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

The Hole dialog appears.

The default Hole type is Simple and default Selection Step isPlacement Face.

Enter .781 in the Diameter field and select the Top face of theCylinder for the Planar Placement face.

Select the bottom face of the cylinder as the thru face.

The dimensions of the hole tool appear.

Choose OK on the Hole dialog.

1-32 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 47: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

The Positioning dialog appears.

Select Point onto Point .

The Point onto Point dialog appears.

Select the top edge of the original cylinder as the target object.

The Set Arc Position dialog appears.

Choose Arc Center.

The Hole is created in the Cylinder.

To see a shaded representation of the model, choose the

Shaded icon .

Hold down and drag the middle mouse button to rotate thepart.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-33

Page 48: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Step 5: Save the part.

Choose the Save icon .

You must save the part in order for it to be storedin the database.

Step 6: Verify that your part has been saved.

Choose the Open icon to access the Open Part File dialog.

1-34 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 49: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

You should see the 5004_### Spacer part in the My Partsfolder.

Choose Cancel to close the Open Part File dialog.

You have now created the first piece part for the Casterassembly.

Step 7: Create the Shaft in your My Parts Folder.

Choose the New icon to create a new part.

Verify that your My Parts folder is the default container.

If the My Parts folder is not the default container,double-click it to make it the default.

Leave the Part Type set to Item.

In the Part Number field, enter 5003_###, where ###represents a number designated by your instructor.

In the Part Revision field, enter 000.

Leave the Part File Type set to Master.

Be sure that your Seed Part setting is Inch.

Choose OK.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-35

Page 50: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

The Edit Database Attributes dialog appears.

With the Part Name highlighted, type Shaft in the Valuefield and press ENTER.

Highlight Part Description and type Project Caster Assy in theValue field and press ENTER.

Choose OK.

Notice the border of the graphics window updates to reflectyour new part.

Step 8: Create the Shaft (a cylinder).

To see a Trimetric view of the part, choose the Trimetric icon

.

Choose the Cylinder icon .

The Cylinder dialog appears.

Choose Diameter, Height.

The Vector Constructor dialog appears.

1-36 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 51: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Choose ZC axis for the cylinder direction.

The arrow appears.

Enter a Diameter of 1.125 and a Height of 2.8125 and chooseOK on the Cylinder dialog.

The Point Constructor dialog appears.

Define a base point of XC=0, YC=0 and ZC=0 and choose OK.

The Cylinder appears.

The Vector Constructor dialog displays giving you theopportunity to create another cylinder.

Choose Cancel to dismiss the Vector Constructor dialog.

Step 9: Create a Boss on the Shaft.

Choose the Boss icon (or Insert→Form Feature→Boss...).

Enter a Diameter of .75 and a Height of 2.1875.

Select the lower planar placement face (bottom of cylinder).

Choose OK on the Boss dialog.

The Positioning dialog appears.

Choose Point onto Point .

Select the lower edge of the large cylinder.

Choose Arc Center on the Set Arc Position dialog.

Choose the Fit icon to fit the cylinder to the graphicswindow.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-37

Page 52: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Step 10: Add a chamfer to the Shaft.

Choose the Insert→Feature Operation→Chamfer option.

By default, the Chamfer icon does not displayin the user interface.

The Chamfer dialog appears.

Choose Single Offset.

Choose the top edge of the large cylinder and choose OK.

Enter the Offset value of .125.

Choose OK on the Chamfer dialog.

1-38 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 53: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Choose Cancel on the Chamfer dialog.

Step 11: Save the part.

Choose the Save icon .

You have now created the second piece part for the CasterAssembly.

Step 12: Close All Parts.

Choose File→Close→All Parts.

Choose Yes to close all parts.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-39

Page 54: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Find by Part Number

The Find command is used in the Part Selection dialog to find a part thatexists in the database. This option is available when creating a new part(using File→New) or opening an existing part (using File→Open).

Choose File→Open, type the part number in the Part Number field andpress the ENTER key. You can use a wildcard symbol (*) when entering thepart number.

1-40 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 55: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

The Find node appears with the requested Find results.

The most recently requested Find requests within a session are restoredevery time the Part Selection dialog is opened. Each time the dialog isopened, the Find node displays in a collapsed state. Expand the + sign toview the Find results.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-41

Page 56: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Creating Assemblies

Creating assemblies in NX Manager Unigraphics works similarly to creatingassemblies in standard Unigraphics NX. To create an assembly, NX ManagerUnigraphics accesses the database to retrieve parts through NX ManagerUnigraphics windows.

A component part may be added to an assembly by choosing the Add Existingoption in the Components pull-down menu in the Assemblies application.This menu contains most of the functions that affect the hierarchicalstructure of the assembly and the relationships between components.The Components pull-down menu is available as long as the Assembliesapplication is turned on.

Assemblies→Components→Add Existing

The Add Existing function allows you to add a component to an assembly,using an existing part revision. The component part to add is specified inthe Select Part dialog.

1-42 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 57: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

The Select Part dialog contains a list of the master part files that arecurrently loaded. You can choose a part that is displayed in the list to add toyour assembly.

If you want to specify a part that is not currently loaded, select the ChoosePart File button. This displays the NX Manager Unigraphics Part Selectiondialog, enabling you to choose an unloaded part revision.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-43

Page 58: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

After you select the part to be added, the Add Existing Part dialog appears.You can use this dialog to define how the existing part will be added as acomponent object to the assembly and what information is stored with it. Inthis class, the only change from defaults is the placement of the part onthe Original layers.

Layer options - Defines which layer the objects in the new component will beadded to in the current work part.

• Work - Places all objects from the component part on the current worklayer.

• Original - Places each object from the component part on the same layerin which it resides in the component part file.

• As Specified - Places all objects from the component on the layer youspecify in the Specified Layer field that displays if you choose this option.

1-44 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 59: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Activity: Creating an Assembly

In this activity, you will create a new Caster Assembly using the piece partsyou created earlier.

Step 1: Create the Caster Assembly.

Choose the New icon.

Verify that My Parts is the default container.

In the Part Number field, enter 5000_###.

In the Part Revision field, enter 000.

Leave the Part File Type set to master and Seed Part setto Inch.

Choose OK.

The Edit Database Attributes dialog appears.

With the Part Name attribute highlighted, type Caster Assy inthe Value field and press ENTER.

With the Part Description field highlighted, type Project CasterAssy in the Value field and press ENTER.

Choose OK.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-45

Page 60: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Step 2: Turn on the Assemblies application.

Choose Application and toggle on the Assemblies option, ifit is not already toggled on.

Choose the Trimetric icon .

Step 3: Add an existing Fork component to the Caster Assembly.

Choose the Add Existing Component icon (or chooseAssemblies→Components→Add Existing...).

1-46 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 61: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

The Select Part dialog appears.

Select the Choose Part File button.

This invokes the Part file name dialog.

Type 50* in the Part Number field and press ENTER.

A list of all parts in the database that start with 50 appears.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-47

Page 62: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Select 5001 Fork from the list and choose OK.

A Warning appears. The part is stored in the database asa V17 part file. It is read-only and loading this file intoUnigraphics NX has automatically modified the file to theUnigraphics NX version.

Choose OK to close the Warning dialog.

1-48 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 63: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

The Add Existing Part dialog appears.

Choose Solid from the Reference Set pull-down menu. Leavethe Positioning field set to Absolute and the Layer Optionsfield set to Original.

Choose OK.

The Point Constructor dialog appears.

Choose OK to accept the default XC=0, YC=0, ZC=0.

The Fork part appears in the window.

Choose Cancel on the Select Part dialog.

Choose the Fit icon.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-49

Page 64: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Step 4: Add the existing Wheel component to the Caster Assembly.

Choose the Add Existing Component icon (or chooseAssemblies→Components→Add Existing...).

Select Choose Part File.

Expand the Find list.

1-50 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 65: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Select the 5005 Wheel item.

Choose OK.

A Warning dialog appears. The Part is stored in the databaseas a V17 part-file. It is Read-only and loading this file intoUnigraphics NX has automatically modified the file to theUnigraphics NX version.

Choose OK to close the Warning dialog.

The Staging View appears in the Component Preview screen,along with the Add Existing Part dialog.

Make sure the Reference Set is set to SOLID.

Verify that Positioning is set to Absolute and Layer Options isset to Original.

Choose OK.

On the Point Constructor dialog, enter the following values:XC=2.5; YC=0; ZC=–2.375.

Notice the ZC value is a negative value. It isimportant to enter the ZC value as a negative.

Choose OK.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-51

Page 66: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Choose the Fit icon.

The wheel geometry assembly is scaled to the screen size foreasier viewing.

Step 5: Add the existing component (Axle) to the Caster Assembly.

The Select Part dialog should still be present.

Select the Choose Part File button.

Expand the Find list.

Select 5002 Axle and choose OK.

Choose OK to dismiss the Warning dialog.

Verify the Reference Set field is set to SOLID.

Verify the Positioning field is set to Absolute and LayerOptions is set to Original.

Choose OK.

On the Point Constructor dialog, enter the following values:XC=2.5; YC=–1.625; ZC=–2.375.

Notice both the YC and ZC values are negative values.It is important to enter these values as negative.

Choose OK.

Step 6: Add the Spacer you created.

The Select Part dialog should still be present.

1-52 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 67: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Select Choose Part File.

Select 5004_### Spacer from the My Parts folder and chooseOK.

The Add Existing Part dialog is displayed.

Choose OK.

On the Point Constructor dialog, press Reset to reset thefollowing values: XC=0; YC=0; ZC=0.

Choose OK.

Choose the Fit icon .

Step 7: Add the Shaft you created.

Select the Choose Part File button.

Select 5003_### Shaft from the My Parts folder and choose OK.

The Add Existing Part dialog is displayed.

Choose OK to accept the defaults.

On the Point Constructor dialog, enter the following values:XC=0; YC=0; ZC=.3125.

Choose OK.

Choose the Fit icon .

Save the Part.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-53

Page 68: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Choose OK to dismiss the Save Warning dialog.

This concludes the activity.

1-54 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 69: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Creating Non-Master Data

In the Master Model process, the master geometry is the single definingdataset for the part. All other applications which use the part (Manufacturing,Drafting, etc.) do so by creating an assembly containing the master geometryas its only component.

The NX Manager Unigraphics database logically organizes the mastergeometry with the other data created in this process. This is done through theuse of manifestations and specifications. To do this, select the existing partnumber and Unigraphics NX populates the Part and Revision fields. If thereare multiple revisions of the selected part, a revision selection can be made.

When the Part File Type selector is changed to specification, manifestation,or altrep a name can be entered into the Part File Name field. The name isused for the data being added to the Part. This name will be visible andselectable later from the Open Part File dialog.

The naming convention for the Part File Name should bestandardized within your company, like the Part Number isstandardized.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-55

Page 70: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Adding Master Geometry to the Non-Master Part

When creating a non-master part, the Add Master toggle is available on theNew Part File dialog. This toggle is not available when master is selectedas the Part File Type.

The non-master Part File Type options are as follows:

• specification – detailed methods, designs, processes and procedures usedto satisfy requirements. The specification fully defines the Item Revision.The specification type is commonly used for drawings.

• manifestation – non-defining "snapshots" of a particular aspect of an Itemor Item Revision at a particular moment in time. The manifestationtype is commonly used for Numerically-Controlled (NC) program filesand drawings.

• altreps – provide a convenient way to model alternative forms ofcomponents (i.e. deformed spring). An altrep is the only type ofnon-master part that can be added or created as a component in anassembly.

When the Add Master toggle is on, the master part file is automatically addedas a component of your non-master part file.

1-56 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 71: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

If you choose to have the master part automatically added to the non-masterpart, you are presented with the Add Master dialog. From this dialog, youcan control several parameters of the master part file component added tothe non-master part.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-57

Page 72: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Activity: Create a Drawing

In this activity, you will create a drawing of the 5003_### Shaft part. You willbe creating a manifestation from your master geometry.

Step 1: Create the new drawing.

Choose the New icon.

Select the part for which you will create the drawing(5003_###/000).

The Part Number and Part Revision fields are filledin automatically when you select the part.

Choose manifestation in the Part File Type field.

You have now designated a non-master part file type. Noticethat the Add Master part option is available. With this optiontoggled on, the master part is automatically added, as anassembly component, to the non-master part.

1-58 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 73: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Verify that the Add Master toggle is on (default).

In the Part File Name field, enter DWG5003_###.

Choose C-Size from the Seed Part pull-down menu.

Choose OK.

Choose OK to accept the defaults in the Edit DatabaseAttributes dialog.

The Add Master dialog displays. This dialog enables you tocontrol a number of parameters of the component that is to beadded to your non-master part.

Choose OK to accept the default values.

The master geometry is now referenced in the drawing.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-59

Page 74: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Step 2: Enter the Drafting application.

Choose the Drafting icon (or chooseApplication→Drafting...).

Step 3: Place the drawing views.

Choose the Add View to Drawing icon (or choose Insert→View → View from the menu bar).

The Add View dialog displays.

1-60 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 75: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Choose the Import View icon from the Add View dialog.

Choose TOP from the list of views on the Add View dialog.

Place the cursor on the drawing screen where you want toposition the Top view and left-click the mouse button.

The Top view appears on the drawing, at the designatedlocation.

Choose TFR-TRI from the list of views on the Add View dialog.

Place the cursor on the drawing screen where you want toposition the TFR-TRI view and left-click the mouse button.

The TFR-TRI view appears on the drawing, at the designatedlocation.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-61

Page 76: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Choose the Orthographic View icon from the Add Viewdialog.

Select Top as the Parent view.

Place the cursor on the drawing screen, below the Top view,and left-click the mouse button.

The Orthographic view appears on the drawing, aligned withand below the top view.

Choose Cancel to dismiss the Add View dialog.

Step 4: Save and Close all parts.

Choose the Save icon .

Choose File→Close→All Parts.

Choose Yes to close all parts.

This concludes the activity.

1-62 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 77: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Creating New Data

Summary

This lesson introduced you to the integration of Unigraphics NX andTeamcenter Engineering otherwise known as NX Manager Unigraphics.

• The Part Selection dialog is a key part of the NX Manager Unigraphicssystem.

• The dialogs that display in NX Manager Unigraphics are similar inappearance to the standard Unigraphics NX dialogs, however, the NXManager Unigraphics dialogs deal with part numbers and revisionsinstead of operating system file names.

• Unigraphics NX in NX Manager Unigraphics keeps Part Attributessynchronized between Unigraphics NX and the Teamcenter Engineeringdatabase.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 1-63

Page 78: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9
Page 79: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Lesson

2 CAD Integration - RevisingExisting Data

Purpose

The purpose of this lesson is to demonstrate how to perform a Save As onexisting parts in NX Manager Unigraphics.

Objective

Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

• Use Save As to Create a New Part based on an existing Part.

• Use Save As to Create a New Revision of an Existing Part.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 2-1

Page 80: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

Using Save As

You can use File→Save As... to do two things:

• Create a new revision of an existing part.

• Create a new part with a new part number.

Whether you create new parts or new part revisions isdetermined by your company’s business rules.

2-2 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 81: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

Save As to Create a New Part

The File→Save As... function in NX Manager Unigraphics provides an easyway to create a new part with a new part number. Your current work part canbe either a master part file or a non-master part file. You can save a masterdataset as a new part and you can save a non-master as a new non-master inan existing Item Revision.

To save the current work part as a non-master part file, the (master) partrevision must already exist.

To save the work part as a master part file, you must specify a new PartNumber and/or Part Revision. The new part is placed in the current defaultcontainer.

The Save As operation results in a new Item, Item Revision and Dataset(s)(datasets will be explained in a later chapter).

When using the Save As function, the standard Part Selection dialog isdisplayed.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 2-3

Page 82: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

Dependent Files

Each UGMASTER dataset may have other associated datasets. Theseassociated datasets are called Dependent files or Named References andmay include tif, gif and cgm files.

If there are dependent files associated with a master part file, the Copy Filesfor Part dialog displays when you use the Save As command to create anew master part file.

The Copy Files for Part dialog allows you to choose whether to copy theassociated dependent files across to the new part number/revision.

2-4 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 83: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

Activity: Save As to Create New Part

In this activity, you will make a copy of the existing 5000_### CasterAssembly (with your new parts added) to a new Caster Assembly.

Step 1: Open the existing 5000_###/000 Caster Assembly.

Choose the Open icon.

Expand the My Parts folder, if necessary.

Select the 5000_### Caster Assy Item and choose OK.

The geometry for the existing Caster Assembly displays inthe graphics window.

Step 2: Use Save As to create the new Caster Assembly.

Choose File→Save As...

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 2-5

Page 84: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

The Save Part File As dialog displays.

Verify that the My Parts folder is the default container.

Leave the Part Type field set to Item.

Enter the new Part Number 5100_###, where ### denotes anumber designated by your instructor.

Enter 000 in the Part Revision field.

Leave the Part File Type field set to master.

Choose OK on the Save Part File As dialog.

2-6 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 85: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

The Edit Database Attributes dialog displays.

Verify that the Part Name attribute is set to Caster Assy.

Highlight the Part Description attribute and enter New CasterAssy in the Value field.

Press the ENTER key.

Choose OK on the Edit Database Attributes dialog.

You have just created a new caster assembly item,5100_###/000 Caster Assy.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 2-7

Page 86: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

Step 3: View the Assembly Navigator.

Choose the Assembly Navigator icon to see the componentsof the assembly.

Select the push-button to keep it open (pin it in place).

Step 4: Swap out the existing 5001 Fork for the 5006 Fork.

In the Assembly Navigator window, right-click on 5001 Forkand choose Close→Part.

2-8 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 87: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

Still in the Assembly Navigator, right-click the previous 5001node and choose Open→Component As....

The Select Part dialog displays.

Select the Choose Part File button.

Type 5006 in the Part Number field and press Enter.

Select 5006 Fork from the Find list and choose OK.

Choose OK to dismiss the Warning dialog.

The 5001 Fork is replaced by the 5006 Fork in the newassembly.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 2-9

Page 88: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

Step 5: Save and Close the Assembly.

Choose File→Close→Save and Close.

Choose OK on the Save Warning dialog.

Step 6: Choose Open and observe that the 5100 has been added to theMy Parts folder.

This concludes the activity.

2-10 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 89: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

Activity: Save As to Create a new Part Revision

In this activity, you will make a new revision of your new 5004_###/000Spacer part.

Step 1: Open the existing 5004_###/000 Spacer.

Expand the My Parts folder, if necessary.

Select the 5004 part and choose OK.

The Part is loaded in the graphics window.

Step 2: Use Save As to create the new Spacer Revision.

Choose File→Save As....

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 2-11

Page 90: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

The Save Part File As dialog displays.

Click the Assign button for the Part Revision field.

The Part Revision field is updated to 001.

Choose OK.

The Edit Database Attributes dialog displays.

Choose OK.

The new Part Revision is created.

Choose the Open icon and expand My Parts.

2-12 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 91: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

Expand the 5004_### Item to see the new Revision.

Choose Cancel on the Open Part File dialog.

Step 3: Close All Parts.

Choose Yes on the Close All Parts warning dialog.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 2-13

Page 92: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

SaveAs Non-Master Part Files dialog

The SaveAs Non-Master Part Files dialog is incorporated into the Save Assequence in the following situation:

• Your current work part is a master part file, and

• your current work part has one or more non-master part files (drawings,manufacturing data, etc.) belonging to it, and

• you intend to save the current work part as a master part file with a newpart number and/or a new part revision.

The Non-Master part files section of the dialog pertains to the non-masterpart files associated with the part.

Using the Non-Master part files section of the form you can:

• Select, from the list of associated non-master part files, the specificnon-master part files you want saved with the new master part.

• Choose the SaveAs All button to save all of the non-master part fileswith the new master part.

• Choose the SaveAs None button to prevent the non-master part files frombeing saved with the new master part.

An Item Revision can contain a UGMASTER dataset and as many non-masterdatasets as you wish (for example, drawings, manufacturing, scenario, andaltreps). Each of the datasets may have other files inside of them. Theseare called Dependent files or Named References (for example, tif, gif andcgm files).

The SaveAs Non-Master part files dialog allows you to copy the associatednon-master and dependent files across to the new part number/revision.

2-14 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 93: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

The Options for Dependent Files section of the dialog pertains to thedependent files associated with the non-master part files that are relatedto the new master part. Using this section of the dialog you can indicatewhether you want to select which dependent files to copy, copy all, or copynone of the associated dependent files.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 2-15

Page 94: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

Activity: Save As that includes Non-Master Data

In this activity, you will make a new Item (5005-Wheel) that includesnon-Master data.

Step 1: Open the existing 5005 Wheel.

Choose the Open icon.

Type 5005 in the Part Number field and press ENTER.

Expand the 5005 Item and Item Revision.

2-16 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 95: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

Notice the Item Revision contains two files.

Select the 5005-000 master from the Find list and choose OK.

Choose OK to dismiss the Warning dialog.

Close the Information window.

Step 2: Use SaveAs to create the new Wheel.

Choose File→Save As....

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 2-17

Page 96: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

The Save Part File As dialog displays.

Verify the My Parts folder is the default container.

Ensure that the Part Type field is set to Item.

Enter 5555_### in the Part Number field, where ### denotes anumber designated by your instructor.

Enter 000 in the Part Revision field.

Ensure that the Part File Type field is set to master.

Choose OK on the Save Part File As dialog.

The Edit Database Attributes dialog displays.

Choose OK on the Edit Database Attributes dialog.

The SaveAs Non-Master part files dialog displays.

2-18 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 97: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

Choose OK.

Close the Information window.

You have just created a new 5555_###/000 Wheel with thenon-Master data.

Choose the Open icon and expand the My Parts folder.

Expand the 5555_### Item and Item Revision.

Notice that the name of the DWG file did update.

Automatic name change for non-master files isimplemented using the DATASET_saveas_patternpreference in the IMAN_DATA/.iman_env file.

Choose Cancel on the Open Part file dialog.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 2-19

Page 98: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

Step 3: Exit NX Manager Unigraphics.

Choose File→Exit.

Choose Yes.

Step 4: Exit Portal.

Choose File→Exit.

Choose Yes.

Close any command windows that are open.

This concludes the activity.

2-20 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 99: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Revising Existing Data

Summary

• The File→SaveAs... function provides an easy way to create a new partfrom an existing part.

• You can do a Save As to create a new part.

• You can do a Save As to create a new revision of an existing part.

• If a master part contains non-master part files, you can revision themaster and non-master part files in a single Save As operation.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 2-21

Page 100: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9
Page 101: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Lesson

3 The Teamcenter EngineeringPortal Interface

Purpose

The purpose of this lesson is to show you the basics of using the TeamcenterEngineering Portal interface.

Objective

Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

• Start Teamcenter Engineering

• Identify Key Areas of the Portal Interface

• View and Change Group and Role Settings

• Modify Properties Columns in Navigator

• Access Online Help for Teamcenter Engineering

• Work with Folders

• Execute General Database Searches

• Modify Object References using Cut, Copy, Append, and Paste

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-1

Page 102: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Starting the Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

When you initially start Teamcenter Engineering, the Default Applicationwindow displays.

Application icons display along the left border of the startup window.This section of the window is referred to as the Application Manager. Atinitial startup, My Navigator is the only application icon displayed in theApplication Manager.

3-2 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 103: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

You can choose the More... button to access a list of other applicationslicensed at your site.

To add application icons to the Application Manager, select the applicationicon from this list.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-3

Page 104: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Teamcenter Engineering Application Startup

Selecting an application icon from the Application Manager initiates thelogin dialog.

• Red triangles indicate required fields.

• The Database field displays the database you will connect to in thissession.

• Enter the required data and choose OK to start a Portal session thatuses the selected database.

Key Points

The following are key points on starting Teamcenter Engineering PortalInterface and Applications:

• The Portal user interface is a stand-alone program.

• This means that you can launch the user interface without logging in.

• When you initially start up Teamcenter Engineering, no applicationsare selected.

• When you select an application, you are presented with a login prompt.

• As you select applications, the applications get loaded into memory.

3-4 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 105: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Activity: Starting Teamcenter Engineering

In this activity, you will start Teamcenter Engineering.

Step 1: Start Teamcenter Engineering.

Your instructor will give you specific instructions forlaunching Portal.

Upon launching Portal, the Default Application window displays.

Step 2: Start My Navigator.

Choose the My Navigator icon in the Application Manager.

The first time you select an Application from the ApplicationManager, you are presented with the Login dialog.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-5

Page 106: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Step 3: Enter your User ID and Password.

In the Log in dialog, enter your User ID and Password andchoose Login.

3-6 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 107: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

The My Navigator window displays.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-7

Page 108: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Application Manager

The following applications, if licensed at your site, can be launched fromthe Application Manager:

• My Navigator is the workspace used to manage your product information.

• PSE, the acronym for Product Structure Editor, is used to view, create,and modify product structure and its associated occurrence data.

• CM Viewer, is used for change management to propose, modify, review,and approve changes to a product’s definition or configuration.

• Classification is used to create and maintain a hierarchical classificationstructure based on the attribute values of your Teamcenter Engineeringobjects.

• Process Viewer is used to view the progress of any Workflow process(even if you are not a participating member of the process).

• Referencers supports the combined Where-Used and Where Referencedfunctions, enabling you to perform either function in the same display.

3-8 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 109: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

• DesignContext enables you to quickly focus on a particular work partand any other parts affected within the context of a change to that part.Use this application to select a Product Item and configure revisionsof components, configure variants of the assembly, review the set ofcomponents, retrieve the components, and initialize their display in aCAD application or a visualization application.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-9

Page 110: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Selecting Applications

There are two ways to select applications in Portal:

• choosing the application icon from the Application Manager

• using the Send To command on the pop-up menu

Using the Application Manager

Use the Application Manager to launch the applications that you want to runin a session. Click the icon of the application that you wish to launch.

The application icons are organized and displayed by product group.

• The Engineering group of application icons, shown in the graphic, provideaccess to the PDM user applications in Teamcenter Engineering.

• Choose Manufacturing to access the applications icons for the TeamcenterManufacturing product.

• Choose Admin to access to the Administration applications icons.

• Choose Utilities to access the product utilities.

3-10 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 111: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Using the Send To Command

You can also launch an application using the Send To command on the pop-upmenu. For example, selecting an Item or Item Revision and selecting SendTo→PSE launches the PSE application.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-11

Page 112: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Logging Out of Teamcenter Engineering (Portal)

To log off from Teamcenter Engineering, choose File→Exit and confirm theExit dialog.

3-12 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 113: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

My Navigator Overview

My Navigator is your window into the database. Following is a graphic of thestandard Teamcenter Engineering My Navigator interface.

Use My Navigator to:

• Organize your product information

• Create objects, perform check-in/check-out (CICO), task management,and query execution

• Store references to objects you access frequently

• Perform and track tasks in your Inbox

• Send and receive Teamcenter Engineering mail

• Conduct searches

• Create and manage data

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-13

Page 114: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Portal Lite for NX Manager Products

A restricted version of Portal is available for some NX Manager products,including NX Manager Unigraphics and NX Manager I-deas. This restrictedversion of the Portal interface is referred to as Portal Lite.

• In Portal Lite, My Navigator is the only application available and severalof the standard My Navigator menu bar options are disabled.

• Portal Lite is suitable for use as a CAD data management tool and can beused to organize, store, retrieve, and version product data.

The My Navigator functionality available in Portal Lite is a subset of themore comprehensive My Navigator functionality taught in this course.

3-14 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 115: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Folder Object Behavior

The folder icon toggles between a closed and open state. Double-click on a

folder (or click the + sign) to open it.

Selecting an object folder and choosing File→Open displays the selectedfolder as a tab in the My Navigator display.

The My Parts folder contains two Items.

You can return to your Home folder by clicking the Open Home Folder icon

.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-15

Page 116: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

My Navigator Tabs

My Navigator displays tabbed sheets to provide easy access to the objects,queries, and tools used to manage your product data.

There are two levels of tabs. The following graphic shows an example of thefirst level of tabs in My Navigator:

You control which tabs display in the first level of tabs. These tabs mayinclude:

Your Home folder

Folders, Items, or Item Revisions you have opened using the File→ Opencommand

Open Queries you have executed in this or previous sessions

Your open Inbox

Key Points

Following are key points related to the first level tabs:

• Once a tab is displayed, it will remain displayed until you close it.

• The Home folder tab allows you to access the contents of your Home folder.

• Query tabs display the results of a query. The red circle with a white dashindicates that the query has not been run in the current session. Thistab can be repositioned or closed.

• You can right-click a query tab to display, reposition and rename the tabsto best support the task you are performing.

• Item/Item Revision tab allows you to access an open Item or Item Revision.

3-16 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 117: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

The following graphic shows the second level of tabs in My Navigor:

These tabs are static and provide access to information about the selectedobject.

Key Points

Following are key points related to the second level tabs:

• The Properties tab displays the properties table corresponding to theselected object.

• The Viewer tab launches the Portal Visualization application used toview the 2D or 3D format of selected objects. You can also view graphicsfor DirectModel datasets.

If you select multiple components to view, each component displays in aseparate cell. If the component has an associated viewer, the image filedisplays. If there is no associated viewer, the cell for that componentcontains the name and type of the component.

If there is no associated viewer for a selected component, suchas a Folder or an Engineering Change, a generic viewer displaysthe properties of the selected component. In some cases,properties of the file can be edited.

• The Referencers tab displays the same window that displays when youaccess the Referencers application. In this tab, you can view the WhereReferenced and Where Used relationships for the selected object.

• The Display Data tab becomes active upon successful execution of a query.

Properties of the objects in the search results can be viewed in the DisplayData tab.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-17

Page 118: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Group and Role Settings

Your account has been set up by your system administrator. The accountconsists of the following:

Person Name: Your actual name

User Name: Your Teamcenter Engineering account name

Your system administrator has also set up the necessary Groups in thesoftware. A User may be in multiple groups. One group is designated asyour default group.

Inside a Group, you (as a User) can perform multiple Roles.

Take for example, the person Joan Wayne. The User account for this personis jwayne. Joan is in two groups, baseline (default group) and training. Insidethe baseline group, Joan performs the role Instructor. Inside the traininggroup, Joan performs the roles Author and Consumer.

The User Name, Group, and Role for the logged in user displays in the MyNavigator window frame. The following graphic shows an example of the userinformation displayed in the My Navigator window frame:

3-18 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 119: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Why have Users, Groups, and Roles?

There are several reasons why using different groups and roles is beneficial:

• manage data access privileges (Read, Write, and Delete)

• define and control review/approve processes

• improve communication by providing information about users, such asphone numbers and email addresses

• organize data according to which group created it

Verifying/Changing your Group and Role Setting

Changing your Group or Role may be required for you to find or access datain the system. Typically you will be working from your default group andyour data will be created with that group.

Choosing Edit→User Setting... displays the User Settings dialog.

From the User Settings dialog, choose Session to verify and/or change yourcurrent Group/Role setting.

Select your desired Group and Role from the pull-down menus and thenchoose OK.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-19

Page 120: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Project Members

Teamcenter Engineering sites can control access to objects by multipleorganizations such as project teams, development teams, suppliers, andcustomers through use of Projects.

Access to objects in projects is controlled on a project by project basis, therebyadding an additional level of data security. Viewing and creating objects inprojects is restricted to the members specifically assigned to the project.

Members are assigned to a project by the Project Administrator or ProjectTeam Administrator for the project.

Individual users and entire groups can be assigned to a project. The rolesassigned to the individual user and group members carry over into theprojects to which they are assigned.

The access team members have to objects in the project depends on the teammember type to which they are assigned. All team members have read accessbut only Privileged Team Members can add, modify, or delete objects in theproject.

The check mark next to Wayne, Joan (waynetr), shown in the SelectedMembers panel of the Member Selection dialog, indicates that the userwaynetr is assigned as a privileged team member.

Creating projects and assigning team members is an administrativefunction taught in the Teamcenter Engineering ApplicationAdministration course.

3-20 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 121: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Activity: My Navigator Overview

In this activity, you will familiarize yourself with the My Navigatorapplication.

Step 1: Familiarize yourself with My Navigator application.

Select each pull-down menu and view the various options.

Move your mouse over various icons on the Toolbar.

Where is the Clipboard ? Is it empty?

Step 2: Go to your Newstuff Folder.

Select the Newstuff folder and choose Open .

The Newstuff folder is opened and displayed on a new tab.There is nothing in your Newstuff folder at this point.

Position your cursor on the tab, right-click and choose MoveTo→Left to move the Newstuff tab to the left.

Position your cursor on the tab, right-click and choose MoveTo→Right to move the Newstuff tab to the right.

Open the Inbox .

Return to the Home folder.

Right-click on the Newstuff folder and send the folder to theReferencers application.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-21

Page 122: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Return to My Navigator.

Verify the Access on the Newstuff folder by looking at theInformation center.

You can view the ’protections at a glance’ using theInformation Center in the lower right corner of theMy Navigator window.

Select the Newstuff folder and choose the Copy icon .

Left-click the Clipboard button to view the Clipboard contents

.

Close the Clipboard Contents window.

Move your cursor over the tab bar, right-click and choose CloseAll to close all open tabs.

Step 3: Return to your Home folder.

Select the Open Home Folder icon.

3-22 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 123: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Step 4: View your Group and Role Setting.

Choose Edit→User Setting...

Choose Session.

Verify your group and role.

Do not change your group or role at this time.

Choose Cancel.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-23

Page 124: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Modifying Properties Columns in My Navigator

You can modify the Properties columns in My Navigator by:

• sorting columns

• changing the column width

• removing/inserting columns

• clicking a column header and dragging it to a new location

You can also sort the rows in the Properties tab by column contents and printthe contents of the Properties tab in table format.

It is a good practice to leave the Object and Type columns as thefirst and second columns in the Properties table.

Also, display only the column options you view/change frequently.The more columns you display, the longer it takes to expand thefolders and items.

3-24 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 125: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Adding Columns to the Properties Table

To add folder properties to the Properties table, right-click on a columnheader and select Insert Columns from the pop-up menu.

The Insert Columns dialog appears. When inserting columns, choose eitherItem or Folder.

Choose Folder from the Insert Columns list and choose Next.

Highlight the desired properties and click the + sign.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-25

Page 126: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Choose Finish and Close when you are done selecting columns. The dialogis dismissed, and the columns corresponding to the selected properties aredisplayed in the table.

3-26 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 127: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Activity: Modifying Properties Columns in Navigator

In this activity, you will modify the Properties columns in My Navigatorapplication.

Step 1: Add the columns for Date Released and Description to the rightof the Release Status column.

In the Properties table, scroll to the right to locate the ReleaseStatus column.

Right-click the Release Status heading and choose + Insertcolumn(s) from the Table Function Menu.

The Insert Columns dialog appears.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-27

Page 128: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Choose Folder then Next.

Highlight the Date Released and Description properties(using the Ctrl key).

Click the + sign.

Choose Finish.

3-28 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 129: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Choose Close.

The Description and Date Released columns appear in theProperties table.

Left-click on the Date Released column heading, drag thecolumn to the right of the Release Status column.

Left-click on the Description column heading, drag the columnto the right of the Date Released column.

Step 2: Change the size of the some of the properties columns (makingthem bigger or smaller) by dragging the sash bars.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-29

Page 130: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

This concludes the activity.

3-30 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 131: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Using Online Help

Teamcenter Engineering provides an extensive online help system which isreferred to as the "Online Help Collection."

Choosing Help→Help→Help Library from the Navigator menu bar displaysaccess to the entire help collection.

You can choose a link to the documentation of interest from this screen.

To locate help on specific topics or terms, you can access the search

functionality by choosing the Search icon .

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-31

Page 132: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Choosing Help→Help→Current Application from the Navigator menu bardisplays help for the current application.

You can navigate to a help topic by choosing a link from the Contents panelor choosing a term from the Index panel.

To locate documentation on specific topics or terms, you can use the searchfunctionality. Access the search functionality by choosing the Search icon

or the Search tab.

3-32 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 133: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Working with Folders

Folders are used in Teamcenter Engineering to organize data. This sectionteaches the basics of how to work with folders.

What are Folders?

This is a typical Folder icon in Teamcenter Engineering: .

• Folders can be used as a tool to organize both company-wide andindividual user data.

• Your company may create a visual method of organizing data usingfolders.

• Data can be referenced by any number of folders.

• Folders can be nested to practically any extent desired.

• A folder in Teamcenter Engineering is not the same as a directory in theoperating system.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-33

Page 134: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Home, Newstuff and Mailbox Folders

The My Navigator application always contains the three default folders:Home, Mailbox, and Newstuff. These folders are automatically created by thesystem and cannot be moved or deleted.

Home Folder

All objects you wish to access with the My Navigator application are placedwithin your Home folder or within some folder structure beneath the Homefolder.

Mailbox Folder

The Mailbox folder is the receiving point for any Teamcenter Engineeringmail that has been sent to you. When you receive new TeamcenterEngineering mail, you will see an envelope display next to the Clipboard.After expanding your Mailbox and reviewing your message(s), the envelopeindicator disappears.

Newstuff Folder

The Newstuff folder is the default folder for newly created database objects.You can designate other folders as the default location for newly createddatabase objects.

3-34 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 135: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Folder Object Behavior

The Folder icon toggles between a closed and open state. To expand orcollapse a folder, choose the + or - symbol next to the Folder icon.

You can also double-click on the Folder icon to expand/collapse it.

Selecting a folder and choosing the Open icon (or File→Open) opens anew My Navigator tab with that folder expanded at the top level.

For example, select the My Parts folder and choose the Open icon to display aMy Navigator window with the My Parts folder at the top level.

You can return to your Home folder by clicking the Open Home Folder icon.

The Home folder tab is now the top level folder in the My Navigator window.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-35

Page 136: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Creating Folders

Folders are a flexible way to organize your product information. An objectfolder can contain other objects and/or other folders.

Choose File→New→Folder... to create a new folder.

Key Points

Key points about the New Folder dialog include the following:

• A red triangle indicates a required field.

• Enter a short descriptive name in the Name field. The limit is 32 ASCIIcharacters.

• You can enter a general text description of up to 240 characters. Thisfield is optional.

• Setting the Type to Folder is recommended for general purposefolders.

3-36 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 137: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Renaming Folders

To change the name of the folders you create, select the folder and chooseView→Properties...

This displays the Properties dialog for the selected folder.

From the Folder Properties dialog box, you can enter a new Name and/orDescription for the folder, if desired.

Moving Folders

You can reorder the object folders in your Home folder structure by movingthem up or down.

Selecting an object folder and choosing Edit→Move→Up moves that folder up(closer to the top-level folder) in the My Navigator object area.

Conversely, selecting an object folder and choosing Edit→Move→Down movesthat folder down in the My Navigator object area.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-37

Page 138: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Deleting Folders

To delete a folder, choose the folder and choose the Delete icon. Aconfirmation dialog displays so you can confirm the deletion.

Choose Yes if you want to delete the folder.

When deleting a folder, the contents of the folder are not deleted.The folder contents remain in the database and can be located andretrieved using the Search feature in My Navigator.

Printing Folders

Printing a folder prints the folder name and a listing of the folder contents.To print a folder, select the folder and choose File→Print or File→Print....

3-38 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 139: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Performing a General Query

You can use the My Navigator search feature to locate PDM data inthe database. Teamcenter Engineering uses predefined query forms astemplates for entering your search criteria. These query forms provide a fast,form-based interface to locate the desired data.

Using the General... query form, you can search the database for manydifferent types of workspace objects (for example, folders or datasets).

To perform a general query, first choose the Search icon.

Next, select the General... query option from the Select a Query pull-downmenu.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-39

Page 140: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

The General... query form displays.

If necessary, click More... to display all fields on the Generalquery form.

The following list describes the fields on the General query form that are usedmost often in performing a search:

• Name: Allows you to search for a particular object in the database basedon its name property.

If you do not know the exact folder name for which you aresearching, you may use a wildcard character (*) or period (.) inthe Name field to broaden the search. Use an asterisk (*) toreplace a string of any length. Use a period (.) to replace onecharacter.

• Description: Allows you to search for a particular object in the databaseusing extra descriptors that may have been defined by the object’s creator.

• Type: Allows you to selectively choose the type of object you are lookingfor.

3-40 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 141: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

• Owning User and Owning Group: If you know the Owning User orOwning Group, select them from the pull-down menu. Otherwise, leavethese fields blank to search for an object that is not owned by you.

To clear the contents of the query form fields, choose the Clear icon .

Example: Finding a Folder

Suppose you want to search for a Folder that is not owned by you. You knowthe Folder name starts with “orient” but you are not sure of the entire name.

• Choose the Search icon.

– Choose General... from the query pull-down list.

– Choose the Clear this query form icon to clear the Owning Userand Owning Group fields.

– Set Type to Folder.

– Enter the search criteria (Name = orient*).

– Choose the Execute this query icon.

The search results are displayed on a new tab in My Navigator. The name onthe query tab matches the name of the query form that you used.

A number is added to the name of the query tab so if multiplequeries are run using the same form, you can differentiate betweenquery results.

You can expand the Orientation folder to view its contents or copy/paste areference to the data into your Home folder.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-41

Page 142: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Typically, you will perform a search to locate data and then transfer theobject to another application to begin your work.

Renaming Search Results

Since multiple query components can be open simultaneously in your MyNavigator window, you may want to rename the query tabs to make yourworkspace easier to use.

Right-click on the search results tab and choose Rename. This brings up aRename dialog.

Enter the desired name for your query, such as Find Orientation, and chooseOK.

Display Data

The Display Data tab becomes active upon successful execution of a query.

Properties of the objects in the search results can be viewed in the DisplayData tab based on the Property Format Finder (PFF) you can select from theSelect Property Formatter pull-down list.

Property Format Finders are also used in generating reports. The procedurefor defining a PFF is taught in the Teamcenter Engineering ApplicationAdministration course.

3-42 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 143: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Key Points

Following are some key points about search results:

• Dynamic display allows you to work with objects in the search resultswindow.

• Active search results tabs are maintained between sessions.

• Multiple results tabs can be displayed in My Navigator.

• Search results can be compared to other search results or to the contentsof your Home folder.

• Search results can be renamed, saved, or printed.

• The Display Data tab can be used to view additional data related tothe objects in the search results.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-43

Page 144: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Refreshing the Query Form

Query results tabs are retained in your My Navigator window from session tosession. However, when you begin working in a new session, it is necessary torefresh the queries to update the results.

If a query has not been executed in the current session, a red circle containing

a white dash is displayed on the query tab .

To refresh a query in a new session, simply click the query tab.

To refresh a query subsequent times during a session choose the Refreshicon or right-click the query tab and select Refresh from the pop-up menu.

3-44 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 145: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Activity: Finding and Working with Folders

In this activity, you will use the Search tool to find the Orientation folder.

Step 1: Find the Orientation folder.

Choose the Search icon .

This brings up the Search window.

Choose General... from the Select a Query pull-down list.

The General query form displays.

If necessary, click More... to display all fields onthe General query form.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-45

Page 146: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Choose the Clear this query form icon to clear the defaultOwning User and Owning Group settings.

Enter orient* in the Name field.

From the Type drop-down list, scroll down the list and selectFolder.

You may need to stretch the Search window to accessthe Type pull-down.

Once you have entered all the information for your query,

choose the Execute this query icon .

The search results are displayed in a new tab. The name on thequery tab matches the name of the query form you used.

3-46 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 147: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Step 2: Rename the query results tab.

You can rename the query results tab to help you remember thedetails of the search.

Right click on the search results tab and choose Rename.

This brings up a Rename window.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-47

Page 148: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Enter the desired name for your query: Folder, Orient*.

Choose OK.

This name appears on the tab in the My Navigator window.

Step 3: Practice expanding and collapsing the Orientation, CompanyStandards, Site Projects, and Templates folders in the searchresults window to see the contents of each.

If you need to frequently access the contents of one of these foldersin the future, you could copy and paste a reference to it in yourHome folder.

Step 4: Close the Search window by clicking the Search icon to deselectthe function. Or, click the small ’x’ in the upper right corner of theSearch window to close the window.

Step 5: Create a new folder called My Folder in your Home folder.

Return to your Home folder by clicking the Home tab or bychoosing the Open Home folder icon.

Select/highlight the Home folder and chooseFile→New→Folder...

3-48 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 149: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Select Folder as the Folder Type.

Choose the More... link to display the list folder types.

Enter the folder Name My Folder.

Leave the description field blank.

Choose OK.

The folder appears in your Home folder.

Step 6: Rename the new Folder you created.

Select your new folder and choose View→Properties....

The Folder Properties dialog for the selected folder displays.

Scroll down through the list of properties and change the Namefrom My Folder to Items and choose OK.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-49

Page 150: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Step 7: Practice using the Edit→Move commands to move folders up ordown in the folder structure.

Step 8: Close all tabs by right-clicking on a tab (such as the Home tab)and choosing Close All.

Step 9: Go to your Home folder.

This concludes the activity.

3-50 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 151: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Activity: Test your Skills

Use the concepts presented in this section to do the following.

Step 1: In your Newstuff folder, create a folder named My Other Folderwith a description of Test your Skills.

Step 2: Change the Description for My Other Folder to Training.

Step 3: How many folders in the database have the description of“Training”?

_________________________________________

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-51

Page 152: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Referencing Database Objects

While it appears that object folders "contain" other objects (because that iswhat you see) the folders actually contain pointers or references to the objects.

The distinction is subtle but very important. Several folders can containreferences to the same object, however, that object is only stored once in theTeamcenter Engineering database.

Therefore, these folders provide pointers to the same product information andallow product information to be shared throughout your enterprise withouthaving to make multiple physical copies of the data.

3-52 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 153: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Using Cut, Copy, Paste, and Append

To modify an object reference, you can select the desired object and use theCut, Copy, and Paste icons.

The Append toggle can be used to retain the existing objects in the Clipboardwhile adding to the Clipboard contents using the Cut and Copy commands.

Key Points

Following are key points about the cut, copy, paste, and append functions:

• These are "clipboard" commands which means that they place informationon the Clipboard (via cut or copy) and "paste" it to another location.

• These commands affect only the references to objects stored in thedatabase; they do not cut, copy and paste actual objects.

• Cut takes the object’s reference out of the folder and puts it on theClipboard. It does not delete an object from the database.

Any existing objects in the Clipboard are overwritten by the cut objects.

To actually delete an object from the database, use the Deletecommand.

• Copy puts a new reference to the object on the Clipboard; the originalreference to the object remains in the folder.

Any existing objects in the Clipboard are overwritten by the copied objects.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-53

Page 154: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

• Toggle on Append to add the selected objects to the Clipboard contents.

The existing objects in the Clipboard are retained.

The Append toggle is located on the Clipboard pop-up menu.The Clipboard pop-up menu can be accessed by right-clickingthe Clipboard button when the Clipboard contains one or moreobjects.

The pop-up menu is not available when the Clipboard is empty.

• Paste places a reference to the object or objects that are in the Clipboardinto the selected folders. The object reference is not taken off theClipboard, so you can perform multiple Paste operations.

To highlight multiple objects, you can hold down the Shift keyto select objects in a range or the Ctrl key to select objects ina discontinuous range.

3-54 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 155: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Activity: Modifying Object References

In this activity, you will use the Copy and Paste actions to place the 6505Racing Skate folder into your Home folder.

Step 1: Find the 6505 Racing Skate Folder.

Choose the Search icon.

If necessary, select General... from the query drop-down list.

Choose the Clear this query form icon.

In the Name field, enter 6505*.

Change Type to Folder.

Choose the Execute this query icon .

The search results are displayed in a new tab.

Close the Search window by choosing the Search icon.

Step 2: Copy and Paste the 6505 Racing Skate folder into your Items folder.

Highlight the 6505 Racing Skate folder from the Search results.

Choose the Copy icon (or Edit→Copy).

Select the Open Home Folder button (or the Home folder tab)to return to your Home folder.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-55

Page 156: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Highlight the Items folder and choose the Paste icon(or Edit→Paste).

Step 3: Expand the 6505 Racing Skate folder to view its contents.

Click the + sign to expand the 6505 Racing Skate folder toview its contents.

This concludes the activity.

3-56 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 157: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Activity: Test Your Skills

Use the concepts presented in this section to do the following.

Step 1: Find the Folder named Consumer Class and paste a reference intoyour Newstuff folder.

Step 2: How many Consumer Class folders exist in the database?

_________________________________________

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-57

Page 158: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Summary

The Portal framework can be used as an enterprise desktop to other relatedapplications used within an organization.

• My Navigator is your window into the database.

• The folder icon toggles between a closed and open state. Double-clickon a folder to open or close them.

• To return to your Home folder, select the Open Home Folder icon.

• You can modify the Properties column in the Navigator application byRemoving/Inserting columns or by clicking a column header and draggingit to a new location.

• Display only the column options you view/change frequently.

• Changing your Group or Role may be required for you to find or accessdata in the system. Choose Edit→User Settings and choose Session toverify and/or change your current Group/Role setting.

• Use My Navigator to store references to objects you access frequently.

• My Navigator will always contain the three default folders: Home,Mailbox, and Newstuff.

• To find an existing folder, choose Search and perform a General querywith the Type set to Folder. Be sure to clear the Owning User andOwning Group fields if the folder is not owned by you.

• To change the Name of a Folder, select the folder and chooseView→Properties..., then enter a new Name and choose OK.

• To delete a folder, select the folder and choose Edit→Delete.

• When you delete a folder, the folder contents are not deleted.

• For data that you need to access frequently, you should copy/paste areference to it in your Home folder.

3-58 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 159: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

The Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

• The Cut, Copy and Paste commands only cut, copy, and paste referencesto objects stored in the database; they do not cut, copy and paste actualobjects.

• Toggle on Append to add objects to the Clipboard (using the Cut or Copycommand) without overwriting the existing contents of the Clipboard.

• To highlight multiple objects, you can hold down the Shift key to selectobjects in a range or the Ctrl key to select objects in a discontinuous range.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 3-59

Page 160: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9
Page 161: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Lesson

4 Finding and Viewing Data

Purpose

The purpose of this lesson is to demonstrate how to find and view data in theTeamcenter Engineering Portal interface.

Objective

Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

• Execute searches to find Item objects.

• View File and Form data associated with Items.

• Set the Item Display option to filter the Item Revisions display.

• Generate Reports.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-1

Page 162: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

What are Items?

Items are the fundamental objects used to manage information in TeamcenterEngineering. Items are generally used for data that is configuration orrevision-controlled.

Items are used to collect a variety of different types of business data - fromCAD files for products, to document files such as specifications and reports.

Each Item has a label containing two separate pieces of information:

• Item ID - a unique identifier for that Item; no two Items can have thesame Item ID. Generally you can think of Item ID as "Part Number"or "Document Number."

In the example graphic, 1503 is the Item ID.

• Item Name - a short description usually for logical names like Bolt,Bracket or the title of a document.

In the example graphic, Wheel is the Item Name.

Company standards dictate conventions for the Item IDs andItem Names used at your site.

Key Points

Following are some key points related to Items:

• An Item can be thought of as a "package" which contains all data relatedto that Item.

• Each Item has at least one Item Revision.

• Items store all revisions of the Item.

4-2 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 163: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

What are Item Types?

The term Item is used to generically describe all types of Items that existin the system. To effectively search for an Item in the system, you shouldsearch for a specific Type of Item.

The system comes with two generic Types of Items:

Item - commonly used for data stored in the system that representsmanufactured product like parts, sub assemblies, end-Items, and tools.Generally, you would search for this Type of Item to retrieve CAD files andother file representations of "part" data like 2D or 3D images of drawings ormodels or to view the Bill of Material for your product.

Document - commonly used for data stored in the system thatrepresents revision or configuration controlled documents like procurementspecifications, test procedures, and design specifications. Generally youwould search for this Type of Item to retrieve the files (word processor orspreadsheet, for example) associated with the type of document.

Many customers define additional Item Types in their system. Thisallows for more specific categorization of data beyond the two Typesdescribed above. Base Teamcenter Engineering is shipped withmore Types, in addition to Item and Document.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-3

Page 164: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Finding Items

Teamcenter Engineering uses predefined saved queries as the basis for mostsearches. These saved queries provide a fast form-based interface to thedatabase. Other queries can be made on an as-needed basis by your SystemAdministrator.

To search for items, choose the Search icon and then select Item...from the query pull-down list.

4-4 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 165: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

This loads the Item... query form. Choose the More... link to see all fieldson the form.

The Item... query form includes search attributes not found on the Generalquery form.

• Enter a name in the Name field to search for a particular Item in thedatabase based on it’s name.

• Enter an Item ID in the Item ID field to search for a particular Item in thedatabase based on the part number or document number.

• The Type field allows you to search for an Item based on its type (forexample, Document or Item). You can change the Type using the selectoror the clear this field.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-5

Page 166: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Special Considerations

• Blank search fields are not used for the search, meaning all values for thefield apply in the search.

• You may use the wildcard character * in the Name or Item ID fields tobroaden your searches. If you do not know the exact name or Part/IDnumber, use * to replace a string that is any length or use a period (.) toreplace a single character.

You can click the Options... button to access additional search criteria andspecifications. You can also use this option to define which predefined queryforms are available of the search form pull-down list.

The Advanced... button allows access to advanced search criteria normallydefined by the Teamcenter Engineering administrator.

4-6 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 167: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Search Results

Once you have selected the desired search criteria, choose the Execute this

query icon to display the results.

For example, entering 21* in the Item ID field on the Item... query formdisplays the following results.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-7

Page 168: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Viewing Objects from the Search Results

Once you have found an Item, you can view the data from the search resultsor you can transfer the Item to another application to begin your work.

For example, expanding the 2111 Item displays the Item Revision contents.

Viewing Objects From your Home Folder

Viewing the objects from your Home folder is the same as viewing from theSearch results window. The difference is that objects in your Home folder willbe there until you remove them. The advantage of keeping a reference to theobject in your Home folder is that you will not have to perform the searchto view the object at a later time.

Since the Search results may be different a day from now or a month fromnow, you may want to retain the search results tab. You can access it during alater session to refresh the search.

4-8 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 169: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Activity: Finding Items

In this activity, you will find Items and create references to them in yourHome folder.

Step 1: Find the 1250 Axle Item.

Choose the Search icon.

Choose Item... from the query list.

Choose Clear this query form .

In the Item ID field, enter 1250.

Choose Execute this query .

Step 2: Copy a Reference to the 1250-Axle Item into your Home folder.

Highlight the 1250-Axle Item in the search results windowand choose Copy.

Paste the 1250 Axle into your Home folder.

Step 3: Find all Items for Wheel components.

In the Search window, choose Clear this query form .

In the Name field, enter wheel.

Choose Execute this query .

Many Items are found in the database that have the Nameproperty of wheel.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-9

Page 170: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Step 4: Rename the search results to Find Wheel.

Right-click on the query tab and rename the query tab toFind Wheel.

Step 5: Copy a Reference to the 1503-Wheel Item into your Home folder.

Highlight the 1503-Wheel Item in the search results windowand choose Copy.

Return to your Home folder in My Navigator and choose Paste.

Step 6: Find all Items with a name that begins with Wheel.

On the Item... query form, enter wheel* in the Name field.

4-10 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 171: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Choose the Execute this query icon .

More Items are found this time because of the wildcardcharacter in the Name field.

To enhance performance, a maximum of thirty (30)objects displays in the search results. The searchpage indicates if there are more objects that metyour search criteria, giving you an opportunityto load them.

Click the Next Page button to see the remaining list of Items.

Step 7: Rename the Search Results to Find Wheel*.

Step 8: Find the Item ID = BBDS5453

Step 9: Copy a Reference to the BBDS5453 Document into your Homefolder.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-11

Page 172: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Comparing Search Results

You can compare the results of one search to those of another search. Supposeyou wish to compare the results of the following two queries:

• Item ID=15*

• Item ID=*15*

First, execute a search using Item ID=15*. Consider renaming the Searchresults to Find 15*.

Then, execute a search using Item ID=*15*. Consider renaming the searchresults to Find *15*.

4-12 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 173: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Right-click on either tab and choose the Compare To menu to to select theother tab.

The Compare Report dialog displays the contents of the selected components.Differences between the selected components are highlighted in green,identical objects have a transparent background, and the object currentlyselected is highlighted in a different color.

You can use the arrows to click through each difference, one at a time.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-13

Page 174: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Activity: Comparing Search Results

In this activity, you will compare the results of two searches.

Step 1: Compare the results of the Find Wheel and Find Wheel* searches.

Right-click on the Find Wheel tab and choose CompareTo→Find Wheel*.

The Compare Report displays.

Click the right arrow to scroll down the list of differences,one at a time.

Close the Compare Report dialog.

This concludes the activity.

4-14 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 175: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Viewing the Contents of Items

Viewing data in Teamcenter Engineering is a one-stop-shopping approach.The Item of interest is found with a query and then any data about theItem is viewed from within the Item.

When you expand an Item, all Revisions belonging to the Item are displayed.

• The 1503 Wheel has three Item Revisions: 000, 001 and 002.

• The Flag symbols next to the 000 and 001 Item Revisions indicatethat these Item Revisions have a Release Status.

• The In-Process symbol indicates that the 1503/001 Item Revision iscurrently in a Workflow process.

• The absence of a symbol indicates working data.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-15

Page 176: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Item Revisions

Item Revisions are used to manage changes (revisions) to Items.

Item Revision labels are similar to Item labels. The main difference is thatthis label shows a revision identifier appended to the Item ID.

Key Points

• An Item Revision can also be thought of as a "package" which containsdata for that Item Revision.

• Item Revisions are what most users commonly access; they are used tomanage changes and track history.

• When an Item is created, the first Item Revision is automatically createdwith it. As future revision changes are made to the Item, additional ItemRevision objects will represent these revision changes in TeamcenterEngineering.

4-16 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 177: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Item Revision Release Status

When viewing the revisions of an Item in Teamcenter Engineering, you shouldalways observe the "Release Status" of the Item Revision. The Release Statusproperty of the object informs you about the function or purpose of the data.

The following list shows possible values for Release Status. This list is anexample developed for this training material. Your company may have adifferent list of possible Release Status values with different meanings.

• Released - Data stored with Item Revisions that have obtained thisstatus are considered "Production" data. The data is in a "write-protected"mode meaning it cannot be changed unless a new revision letter is created.

• Pre-Released - Data stored with Item Revisions that have obtained thisstatus are also in a write-protected mode and cannot be changed unlessa new revision letter is created. However, the data is not intended forProduction use. The Designer or Engineer can arbitrarily apply thisstatus to freeze the data for use for building prototypes or for providingpreliminary data to customers and suppliers.

• ECPending - Data stored with Item Revisions that have obtained thisstatus are not in a write-protected mode and can still be changed. Thisstatus informs the consumer of the data that this revision is currentlyin an Engineering Change process. At the successful completion of theprocess the Release Status value will change to "Released".

• (Empty Value) - If the Item Revision has no value for status, it is said tobe "Working" data. That means someone is currently working on the datacontained in the Item Revision.

• Approved - Pertains to Items of Type Document.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-17

Page 178: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Item Display

You can control which Item Revisions display in the Item hierarchy using theItem Display option.

Use the My Navigator Edit→Options function to access and set the Revisiondisplay filter.

Following is the general procedure for setting the filter to limit the ItemRevisions that display in My Navigator:

1. Choose Edit→ Options....

2. Under the General options folder, select Item and choose the Display tab.

The Display tab shows the Revisions display filter dialog which, bydefault, is set to Show all revisions.

3. Set the Display filter.

• Check the Show displayable revisions only toggle to enable access tothe display filter settings.

• Use the Rule and Conditions table to set the display filter.

4-18 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 179: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

4. Choose OK to accept the entries and dismiss the Options dialog.

Once the filter is applied, only the Item Revisions that meet the displayfilter criteria display in the Item hierarchy in My Navigator.

A list of the Item Revisions that do not meet the display filter criteria can beviewed by clicking the More... box in the Item hierarchy.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-19

Page 180: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Activity: Setting the Item Display Filter

In this activity, you will set the Item Display filter to limit the Revisions thatdisplay in My Navigator to those that are Working or have been Approved.

Step 1: Choose Edit→ Options....

Step 2: Under the General options folder, select Item and choose theDisplay tab.

The Display tab shows the Revisions display filter dialog.

Step 3: Set the Display filter.

Check the Show displayable revisions only toggle.

4-20 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 181: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

This enables access to the Rule and Conditions table forsetting the filter.

Click the plus sign to add a row to the table.

This row specifies that Working Revisions of Items aredisplayed.

Click the plus sign to add another row to the table.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-21

Page 182: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Double-click in the second row of the Rule column to access theRule pull-down list and select Release status.

Double-click in the second row of the Condition column toaccess the Condition pull-down list and select Approve.

The Rules and Conditions table is now set to limit the displayof Item Revisions to those that are Working or Approved.

4-22 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 183: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Step 4: Choose OK to accept the entries and dismiss the Options dialog.

The filter is applied and only the Item Revisions that meetthe display filter criteria display in the Item hierarchy in MyNavigator.

Step 5: Expand the Items folder and the Items and Item Revisions inthe folder.

Step 6: Click the More... box in the Item hierarchy to view a list of theItem Revisions that do not meet the display filter criteria.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-23

Page 184: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Step 7: Open the Items Display dialog and set the Revisions display filterback to Show all revisions.

Choose Edit→ Options....

Under the General options folder, select Item and choose theDisplay tab.

Check the Show all revisions toggle.

The Rule and Conditions table is shaded indicating the filter isnot active.

Choose OK to accept the entry and dismiss the Options dialog.

The filter is applied.

Notice that all Item Revisions now display in the Itemhierarchy in My Navigator.

This concludes the activity.

4-24 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 185: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Item Revision Contents

When you expand an Item Revision, Teamcenter Engineering displays theItem Revision contents.

Key Points

• Item Revisions generally contain objects referred to as Forms and/orDatasets.

– Forms represent attribute data for the Item.

– Datasets represent physical data files for the Item.

• Item Revisions may also contain other objects such as folders and evenother Item Revisions.

• The contents of an Item Revision are dependant on the Item Type andhow a company chooses to organize data in the system.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-25

Page 186: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

"Item Revision Master" Data

The Item Revision Master is a Form that displays additional attributesspecific to the Item Revision. Companies will often change the design of thisform so that it collects and presents attribute data specific to their businessneeds.

Selecting the form and the Viewer tab displays the form contents. The formshown below is an example developed for this training material.

4-26 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 187: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

"Specification" Data

Specification data is considered the defining data for the Item Revision.The example below shows a UGMASTER Dataset that contains the CADmodel data of a part definition. The UGMASTER dataset is specific to theUnigraphics NX integration with Teamcenter Engineering.

You can select a dataset and choose View→Named References to view all thefiles for the dataset.

"Requirement" Data

Requirement data is data that documents requirements for the Item Revisionwithout explicitly defining the product. In the example below, the BBDS5453document is a design specification that was used during the design of thepart number 1250 axle component.

"Manifestation" Data

Manifestation data is data that is directly derived from the specificationdata but is not considered defining data. For CAD defined Items, drafting,manufacturing, and analysis data is often found under this heading.

"Reference" Data

Reference data may exist in a variety of different formats depending on thetype, purpose and status of the Item Revision.

In the example below, a Release Checklist form is shown.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-27

Page 188: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

"Rendering" Data

The DirectModel is a 3D image format of the part model for viewing withPortal Visualization. If you select the object and raise the Viewer tab, thefile will display in the Portal Visualization application, if it is available onyour workstation.

4-28 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 189: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Activity: Viewing Item, Form, and File (Dataset) Data

In this activity, you will view file and form data contained within an Item.

Step 1: View the contents of your Home Folder.

Step 2: Find and expand the 1250-Axle.

Observe there are two Item Revisions for this Item. Revision000 is Released, and Revision 001 is Work-In-Progress; there isno value for Release Status.

Step 3: View the data for Revision 000.

Expand the 1250/000-Axle Item Revision.

Double click the 1250/000 Item Revision Master form.

Choose Yes to the Read only message.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-29

Page 190: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Choose Cancel to close the form.

You can also choose the Item Revision Master formobject and choose the Viewer tab to view the form.

Select the UGMASTER Product Vision data object and choosethe Viewer tab to view the part.

4-30 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 191: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Select the DWG1250/- dataset and choose the Viewer tab toview the image of the CAD drawing.

Step 4: Clean up your Home folder.

Cut all Items in your Home folder and paste them into yourItems folder.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-31

Page 192: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Activity: Test Your Skills

Use the Find and View techniques presented in this lesson to answer thefollowing questions.

Step 1: What is the diameter of the Part Number 1250, Revision 000 Axle?

_________________________________________

Step 2: What is the latest "Released" revision of the Part Number 1510Wheel Assembly?

_________________________________________

Step 3: From what material is the Part Number 1502 Spacer fabricated?

_________________________________________

Step 4: When was Revision 000 of the BBDS5453 document approved?

_________________________________________

Step 5: How many spokes does Revision 001 of the 1503 wheel have?

_________________________________________

This concludes the activity.

4-32 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 193: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Generating Reports

Use the My Navigator Tools→ Reports command to generate and viewreports.

Following is the general procedure for generating a report:

1. Choose Tools→Reports.

2. Select the Report Design.

Some default report designs are delivered with Teamcenter Engineering.

Report designs may also be created by your administrator using theReport Designer application available in the Admin application group.

3. If desired, adjust the query criteria and sorting options for the report.

4. Choose the output format for the report.

Report contents can be sent to a comma-delimited file or output formatsdefined by your site administrator.

Output formats may include html and xls files.

Reports sent to an html output format are displayed in a browser.

Reports sent to an xls output format are displayed in a spreadsheet.

You can save or print the report using the Save and Print commandsavailable in the output format tool you choose for the report.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-33

Page 194: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Activity: Generating a Report

In this activity, you will practice generating a report and viewing it in yourbrowser.

Step 1: Choose Tools→ Reports from the My Navigator menu bar.

The Report Creation Wizard screen displays.

Step 2: Select the Report Design to use for the report.

Scroll down the list of Report Designs and select Admin-ObjectOwnership.

Choose Next.

The Fill in Criteria dialog displays.

4-34 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 195: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Step 3: Review and, if necessary, adjust the query criteria for the report.

You can use the pull-down list next to each criteria field to viewand select the desired query criteria for your report. For thisactivity, retain the current settings.

Choose the Query Options icon.

The options dialog displays.

You can use this dialog to view and adjust the additionalcriteria and sorting options for the report.

Choose the Sort Options tab.

Scroll down to the list of sort fields and select Name.

In the Name row, click the field in the Order By column andchoose Descending from the pull-down list.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-35

Page 196: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Choose OK.

Step 4: Choose the output format and generate the report.

Choose Next to display the Select Format dialog.

To send the report contents to a comma-delimited file,you would choose Finish at this point.

Select default_xml_template.xsl as the report format.

Choose Finish.

The report generator determines how many items meet thequery criteria and displays the alert dialog.

Choose Yes to generate the report or choose No to cancel thereport generation.

For this activity, choose Yes.

The report is generated and displays in the selected format.

4-36 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 197: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 4-37

Page 198: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Finding and Viewing Data

Summary

• Items are generally used to model revision-controlled data.

• An Item can be thought of as a "package" which contains all data relatedto that Item.

• To search for Items, choose Item... from the Search window.

• Each Item has at least one Item Revision.

• Item Revisions are used to store specific information about a particularrevision of an Item.

• You can control which Item Revisions display in the Item hierarchy usingthe Item Display option.

• An Item Revision can contain different types of Forms and Datasets.

• A dataset is an object that stores and manages a collection of data files fora particular application and purpose.

• Release Status is an attribute assigned to an object after the object hassuccessfully gone through a Teamcenter Engineering Workflow process.

• You can generate reports using the Report Designs available from theCreate Report Wizard. Access this wizard using Tools→ Reports.

• Report output can be created as a comma delimited file, an xls spreadsheetfile, or an html file that displays in a browser window.

• Reports can be viewed, saved, and printed using the output tool youchoose when generating a report.

4-38 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 199: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Lesson

5 Creating Data in TeamcenterEngineering

Purpose

In this lesson you will create data using the Teamcenter Engineeringinterface.

Objective

Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create an Item within Teamcenter Engineering.

• Populate Forms within Teamcenter Engineering.

• Create a new Dataset for an Item created in Teamcenter Engineering.

• Perform an Implicit and Explicit check-out.

• Change Ownership of data.

• Use File→Save As to create a new Item.

• Use File→Revise to create a new Revision of an existing Item.

• Open an earlier version of a Dataset.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5-1

Page 200: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

User Setting

Before creating any new data, you should verify that your User Setting is setto the correct value.

This is important because any new data you create inherits the OwningGroup property from the user setting of the user that created the data. TheOwning Group property of the data is an important property of the data inthe context of access control (Read, Write, Delete etc.).

Choose Edit→User Setting... to display the User Settings dialog.

Use the pull-down list for the Group and Role fields to change your currentGroup and Role setting.

Choose OK to make a change. Your current Group and Role are updated inthe My Navigator window.

5-2 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 201: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Creating Items from Teamcenter EngineeringThe New Item dialog allows you to create a new Item or add a new revision toan existing Item. Use the following procedure to create a new item:

• Select the folder to which you want to add the item and chooseFile→New→Item....

The New Item dialog displays.

• Select Item as the Type and choose Next.

The Item Information form displays.

• Enter the basic information for the new item and choose Finish.

The new item is created in the selected folder.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5-3

Page 202: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Key Points

Following are key points about the New Item dialog:

• Make sure you have the proper Item Type selected.

• Red triangles indicate required fields.

• ItemID is a unique identifier for that Item; no two Items can have thesame Item ID.

• Rev is a unique revision identifier for the Item Revision.

• Name is a short description usually for logical names like bolt, bracketor buckle.

Some companies define specific conventions to use whenassigning an Item Name.

• Clicking the Assign button, located to the right of Item ID fields,populates the ItemID and Rev fields with an automatically-generateddefault Item ID and Revision.

Many enterprises use a special revision identifier to designatethe initial revision of any part or assembly. For example, someenterprises use ’000’ for the first revision.

• Entries in the Description and Unit of Measure fields are optional.

Deleting an Item

When deleting an Item, the Item Master, Item Revision(s), and Item RevisionMaster(s) are also deleted.

The objects referenced by the Item or Item Revision are not deleted. You canaccess the referenced objects from the database using the Search function.Deleting the contents of an Item can be done before deleting the Item.

To delete an Item, select the Item and choose the Delete icon.

Printing an Item

Printing an Item prints the Item name and the property values of the Item.

To print an Item, select it and choose File→Print or File→Print... from themenu bar.

5-4 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 203: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Activity: Create an Item in My Navigator

In this activity, you will create a non-CAD Item from Teamcenter Engineering.

Step 1: Change your Role to Product Engineer.

Choose Edit→User Setting...

From the Role drop-down list, choose Product Engineer.

Choose OK.

Step 2: Create an Item from Teamcenter Engineering.

In My Navigator, select the Items folder.

Choose File→New→Item....

The New Item dialog displays.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5-5

Page 204: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Select Item as the item type to create and choose Next.

The Item Information form displays.

In the ItemID field, enter BBMS2145_###.

In the Rev field, enter 000.

In the Name field, enter Grease.

From the Unit of Measure drop-down list, select oz.

Choose Finish.

The new Item is created in the Items folder.

Choose Close to close the New Item dialog.

This concludes the activity.

5-6 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 205: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Populating the Item With Data

Now that you have created an Item, the next step may be filling out formsand adding file data to the Item.

Populating the Item Revision Master Forms

Every time a new Item or new Item Revision object is created, the ItemRevision Master form is created automatically.

You can access the Item Revision Master form object by expanding the Itemand Item Revision object.

Item Revision Master Form

You can open the form to edit it by double-clicking the object or by selectingthe object and choosing the Viewer tab.

This Form has been customized for this training class.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5-7

Page 206: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Activity: Populate the Item Revision Master Forms

In this activity, you will populate the Item Revision Master Form.

Step 1: Add data to the BBMS2145 Item Revision Master Form.

Expand your BBMS2145 Grease Item and Item Revisionobjects.

Double-click the Item Revision Master Form.

Add some data to the Form.

Choose OK to save the changes and close the Form.

Choose the Viewer tab to view the data you entered in theForm.

This concludes the activity.

5-8 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 207: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

What is a Dataset?

Datasets are used to manage data files created by non-TeamcenterEngineering applications. Datasets are typically stored in Item Revisions.The icon preceding the dataset name may vary depending on the associatedapplication.

When non-Teamcenter Engineering applications are started from TeamcenterEngineering, the files these products generate are maintained by TeamcenterEngineering. The object used to manage these third party product files iscalled a dataset.

Dataset Object Behavior

Double-clicking a dataset launches a software application and loads a file inthe application.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5-9

Page 208: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Item and Item Revision Relations

When data is added to an Item Revision, it is important that the rightRelation be defined between the added data and the Item Revision.Teamcenter Engineering uses the Relation definition to control internalTeamcenter Engineering functions.

Enterprises typically use many pieces of information that in some waydescribe or relate to an Item or Item Revision. Teamcenter Engineering usesthe concept of a relation to describe these associations (relationships).

Many Item or Item Revision relations are automatically defined byTeamcenter Engineering when you create or add certain objects inside anItem or Item Revision structure. These relation types are:

• Revision (for Item Revisions)

• Item Master and Item Revision Master (an object in which someattributes are kept)

• BOMView and BOMView Revision

For example, when you add a new Item Revision to an existing Item,Teamcenter Engineering automatically defines the new Item Revision as arevisionrelation.

5-10 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 209: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

In addition to the automatically defined relation types, there are four otherrelation types used with Items and Item Revisions. They are:

• Specification Relations relations are detailed methods, designs, processesand procedures used to satisfy requirements. The specification fullydefines the Item Revision.

• Manifestation Relations are non-defining "snapshots" of a particularaspect of an Item or Item Revision at a particular moment in time. Forexample, Numerically-Controlled (NC) program files are a commonmanifestation.

• Requirement Relations are criteria that must be satisfied by this Itemor Item Revision. However, requirements often don’t specify how thiscriteria should be satisfied. For example, a requirements relation mightspecify maximum weight for an Item Revision but not how to construct it.

• Reference Relations describe a general "non-defining" relationship of aobject to an Item or Item Revision. This relation type can be thought of asa "miscellaneous" relation type.

These relationships are typically defined when you paste an object referenceinto an Item or Item Revision using Edit→Paste or Edit→Paste....

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5-11

Page 210: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Activity: Create Datasets

In this activity, you will create a dataset for the Grease Item.

Step 1: Create a dataset with a Specification relation to the Grease Item.

Expand the BBMS2145 Grease Item and Item Revision.

Select the BBMS2145_###/000-Grease Item Revision object.

Choose File→New→Dataset....

The New Dataset dialog appears.

Set the Type to Text.

In the Name field, add -Spec Sheet to the end of the defaultName, as shown below.

5-12 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 211: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Choose the import file button .

The Import File dialog appears.

Use this dialog to navigate to the operating system directoryspecified by your instructor.

Select the bbms2145.txt file and choose Import.

Choose OK.

The dataset is created with a specification relation.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5-13

Page 212: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Step 2: Create a dataset with a Reference relation to the Grease Item.

In order to end up with the Reference relation between the Textdataset and the Item Revision, you will first create the datasetin the Item Revision and then Cut it and use Paste... to put itback into your Item Revision with a different relation. If youcreate it directly in your Item Revision, it would end up havingSpecification relation to the Item Revision.

Expand the BBMS2145 Grease Item and Item Revision.

Select the BBMS2145_###/000-Grease Item Revision object.

Choose File→New→Dataset....

Set the Type to Text.

In the Name field, add -Suppliers to the end of the defaultname, as shown below:

Choose the import file button .

The Import File dialog appears.

Use this dialog to navigate to the operating system directoryspecified by your instructor.

Select the bbms_supplier.txt file and choose Import.

This returns you to the New Dataset dialog.

5-14 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 213: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Choose OK.

The Text dataset is created in your Item as a Specificationrelation.

Select the BBMS2145-###/000-Suppliers Text dataset andchoose Cut.

Select your BBMS2145-###/000-Grease Item Revision andchoose Edit→Paste....

Make sure to choose Edit→Paste... (three dots),instead of Edit→Paste (no dots).

The Paste... dialog displays.

Scroll down the list until you see References.

Select References and choose OK.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5-15

Page 214: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

The Text dataset is now in your Item Revision with the correctrelationship.

This concludes the activity.

5-16 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 215: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Dataset Checkout

Check-Out and Check-In procedures are used to ensure that two users do notsimultaneously update database objects. The ability to perform a check-outis important because, in a group write environment, users must protect thedata while they are working on it.

Implicit Check-Out

An Implicit Check-Out is performed automatically by the system.

Whenever you open a dataset to modify it, an implicit check-out isautomatically performed by Teamcenter Engineering. This means that thedataset cannot be modified by anyone else while you are working on it.

When you complete the modifications by closing the editing session, thedataset is automatically checked back into the database (the implicitcheck-out is reversed).

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5-17

Page 216: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Explicit Check-Out

An Explicit Check-Out is performed manually by the user.

Following are characteristics of an Explicit Check-Out:

• Performing an Explicit Check-out locks a dataset against modifications byother users whether you are currently editing the file or not.

• While a dataset is Checked-Out, the user that performed the Check-Outhas write access, while other users have read access of the incrementalchanges.

• The Change ID field is used to correlate Checked-Out objects with pendingCM (Change Management) jobs. This field is optional.

• When checking-out a dataset, you can export the associated file to theoperating system at the same time using the Export Dataset on Checkouttoggle.

5-18 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 217: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Activity: Modify the Dataset

In this activity, you will observe the Implicit (automatic) Check-Out/Inprocess and perform an Explicit (manual) Check-Out/In on a dataset object.

Step 1: Observe Implicit Check-out.

Expand your BBMS2145-###-Grease Item and Item Revisionobjects.

Select the BBMS2145_###/000-Grease Item Revision object.

In the Properties tab, scroll to the right to see the CO column.This column shows the check-out status of the dataset.

Notice the CO status of your BBMS2145_###/000-Suppliersdataset is currently not checked out.

Double-click the BBMS2145_###/000-Suppliers dataset toopen it and then minimize the text editor application thatis launched.

Re-select your BBMS2145_###/000-Grease Item Revisionobject to update the Properties table.

Notice the dataset is currently checked out.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5-19

Page 218: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Maximize then close the text editor application.

Notice the dataset is no longer checked out.

Step 2: Modify the Dataset.

Open the BBMS2145_###/000-Suppliers dataset bydouble-clicking.

Add a line of text (such as ACME Grease Company).

Choose File→Save.

Choose File→Exit.

Step 3: Perform an Explicit Check-Out.

Select your BBMS2145_###/000-Suppliers dataset and chooseTools→Check-In/Out→Check-Out....

Enter Comment: Long term editing.

Choose Yes.

Select your BBMS2145_###/000-Grease Item Revision objectto update the Properties table.

5-20 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 219: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Notice the dataset is currently checked out. It will remain inthis state until you choose to perform an Explicit Check-In.

Step 4: Perform Explicit Check-In.

Select the BBMS2145_###/000-Suppliers dataset and chooseTools→Check-In/Out→Check-In....

Choose YES.

Select your BBMS2145_###/000-Grease Item Revision objectto update the Properties table.

Notice the dataset is no longer checked out.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5-21

Page 220: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Dataset Files (Named References)

In Teamcenter Engineering, datasets can manage several different file types.These file types are called the named references of that dataset.

Selecting a dataset and choosing View→Named References... (or right-clickNamed References) displays the Named References dialog for that dataset.You can use this dialog to view or modify the named references (files) forthat dataset.

The Cut, Copy, and Paste icons in the Named References dialog are used tocut, copy and paste object references between two Named References dialogs.

5-22 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 221: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Dataset Versions

When changes are made to datasets, new dataset versions are created inTeamcenter Engineering. You can use these versions to track changes andundo changes by reverting to a previous version of the dataset using File→Open....

Selecting a dataset and choosing File→Open... displays the Open... dialog.You can specify a particular version of a dataset and/or a specific softwareapplication (tool) to use for the current editing session.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5-23

Page 222: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Key Points

Following are some key points about dataset versions:

• As work progresses and you successively modify a particular dataset,new versions are added to the database but version-0 always referencesthe latest version of the dataset.

• The default version is the latest. In most cases, you should work withthis version unless you have some specific reason to open an earlierversion. This might be the case if you want to undo changes made inthe latest version.

• Normally, you only see the version-0 dataset in the My Navigatorworkspace area; Teamcenter Engineering hides other dataset versions toreduce clutter.

• Teamcenter Engineering manages multiple dataset versions until theversion limit is reached.

When the version limit is exceeded, the earliest version of the dataset ispurged from the database in order to make room for the new version.

A Note about Search Options

The Latest Dataset Versions toggle on the Search Options dialog can be usedto either show or hide dataset versions in search results. Set the toggle on ifyou want to show dataset versions.

By default, the toggle is off.

5-24 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 223: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Activity: Open an Earlier Version of a Text Dataset

In this activity, you will view the named references of theBBMS2145_###/000-Suppliers dataset and open a previous version of thedataset.

Step 1: View the Named References of the BBMS2145_###/000-Suppliersdataset.

Select the BBMS2145_###/000-Suppliers text dataset.

Choose View→Named References....

The Named References dialog displays.

Close the Named References dialog.

Step 2: Open an earlier version of the BBMS2145_###/000-Suppliersdataset.

Select the BBMS2145_###/000-Suppliers text dataset.

Choose File→Open....

Select the Version drop-down list to see the previous versionsof the dataset.

Choose the second-to-last version number.

Expand the TextEditor tool.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5-25

Page 224: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Select bbms_supplier.txt and choose OK.

The previous version of the text file opens in a text editor.The line of text added to this file in an earlier activity is notincluded in this version of the dataset.

Exit the text editor.

This concludes the activity.

5-26 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 225: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Changing Ownership

The Owning User and Owning Group properties of the data can be modifiedbefore the data is released.

To change ownership of data, select the object (multiple objects can beselected) and choose Edit→Change Ownership...

Choose the New Owning User button and navigate the organization chart toselect the Owning User as a member of the Owning Group.

To change only the Owning Group, select the current Owning Useras a member of the new Owning Group.

After release, the ability to change these properties is restrictedto the System Administrator.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5-27

Page 226: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Item Save As and Revise from Teamcenter Engineering

Using Save As for Non-CAD Item

Use the File→Save As command to create a new Item from an existingItem Revision.

Select an existing Item Revision as the basis of the new Item and choose SaveAs... from the File menu.

The Save Item As dialog displays.

Click Assign to automatically generate the next available Item ID andrevision, or manually enter an Item and Revision ID.

The unit of measure and Item type are carried over from theoriginal Item and cannot be modified.

Choose Finish to create the new Item and dismiss the dialog or choose Next tocreate the Item and continue to define data for the Item.

The Save As command should only be used to create Items. Tocreate Item Revisions, use the Revise command.

5-28 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 227: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Using Revise for Non-CAD Item

Use the Revise command to create the next Revision of an existing ItemRevision.

Following is the basic procedure for creating a new Item Revision:

1. Select an Item Revision in the tree or Properties table to be the basis ofthe new revision and choose File→Revise....

The Revise dialog displays with the Item ID and Name of the ItemRevision already entered in the form.

2. Assign a value to the Rev field for the new Item Revision.

• Click Assign to automatically generate the next available Revisionin the Rev field or assign the revision manually by entering it inthe Rev field.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5-29

Page 228: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

• Optionally, select a Unit of Measure and enter a Description.

• Choose Next to continue.

The Revise Item Revision prompt displays.

3. Choose Yes to proceed (or No to cancel the operation).

The Item Master Form displays.

4. Select and enter information in the Revise forms, as needed.

You can define the Item Master data or, using the links in the Steps panel,select another form and enter the related information.

The values for the Item Master and other information formsdefault to the values from the source Item Revision. You canretain the default values or define other information for the newItem Revision using these forms.

5. Choose Finish to create the new Item Revision then choose Close todismiss the Revision dialog.

The Item Revision is created and displayed beneath the Item Revisionoriginally selected in the tree.

5-30 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 229: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Activity: Performing a Save As and Revise

In this activity, you will perform Save As and Revise operations on an Item ofType Document.

Step 1: Create a New Item of Type Document in your Newstuff folder.

In My Navigator, select your Newstuff folder and chooseFile→New→Item....

Select Document for Type.

Choose Next to continue.

Click the Assign button to get the Item ID and Revision.

Enter a Name (use Test for this exercise).

Choose Finish, then Close.

Expand the Document and Document Revision.

Notice that a Text dataset is created automatically becauseof the business rules that are in place.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5-31

Page 230: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Step 2: Use File→Revise... to create a New Revision of the Documentbased on the existing Revision A.

Select your new Document Revision and choose File→Revise....

If you select the Document itself and chooseFile→Revise..., an error message displays indicatingthat only Item Revisions are valid to be Revised.

Click Assign to generate a value for the Rev field.

ChooseFinish to create the new Document Revision thenchoose Close to dismiss the dialog.

Expand the Document Revision.

Notice that a new Revision and new dataset have been createdbut the name of the new dataset is the same as the originaldataset.

Select the new datset and choose View→ Properties to changethe name.

5-32 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 231: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Step 3: Use File→Save As to create a Document based on an existingDocument Revision.

Select Revision A of the Test Document you created previously.

Choose File→Save As.

Choose the Assign button to populate the Item ID andRevision.

Choose Finish then Close.

The New Document, based on the existing Document, iscreated.

Expand the new Document and Document Revision.

This time a new Item, Item Revision, and datset have beencreated but the name of the new dataset is the same as theoriginal dataset.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5-33

Page 232: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Select the dataset and choose View→ Properties to correctthe name.

This concludes the activity.

5-34 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 233: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Creating Data in Teamcenter Engineering

Summary

In this lesson, you learned how to create Items and Item Revisions.

• An Item is the fundamental object used to manage information inTeamcenter Engineering.

• An Item Revision is used to manage changes (revisions) to Items.

• Datasets are used to manage data files created by other softwareapplications.

• Use File→Save As to create a new Item based on an existing Item.

• Use File→Revise to create a new Revision of an Item based on an existingRevision.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 5-35

Page 234: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9
Page 235: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Lesson

6 CAD Integration - Visualization& Dataset Management

Purpose

The purpose of this lesson is to create visualization data for CAD data. Youwill also learn how to store dependent files with Unigraphics NX parts andhow to protect data using Explicit Check-Out.

Objective

Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create 3D Visualization Data

• Create 2D Visualization Data

• Perform an Explicit Check-Out of a Unigraphics NX part

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 6-1

Page 236: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Creating 3D Visualization Data

You can create 3D visualization data from the CAD interface using the SaveOptions dialog. 3D visualization data exists as a DirectModel dataset objectwithin an Item Revision.

Save Options Dialog

To create 3D visualization data from the CAD interface, you must usethe Save Options dialog. The Save Options dialog allows you to specifypreferences for certain default actions you would like to take place every timeyou use the File→Save command.

When you select File→Options→Save Options, the Save Options dialogdisplays:

Toggling on the Save Teamcenter Vis Data option and choosing OK generatesTeamcenter Vis (.jt) files when a part is saved.

This option saves visualization data for piece parts only (notassemblies).

6-2 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 237: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Activity: Creating 3D Visualization Data

In this activity, you will create 3D visualization data for the Shaft and Spacer.

Step 1: In Unigraphics, open the 5000_### Caster Assy.

Step 2: Use the Assembly Navigator to make the 5003_### the Work Part.

Choose the Assembly Navigator tab and select the

push-button to keep it open (pin it in place) .

Right–click the 5003_### /000 object and choose Make WorkPart.

Step 3: Turn on Save Teamcenter Vis Data Option.

Choose File→Options→Save Options.

Toggle on Save Teamcenter Vis Data option.

Choose OK.

Step 4: Save the 5003_### part.

Choose Save .

Step 5: Use the Assembly Navigator to make the 5004_### the Work Part.

In the Assembly Navigator, right-click the 5004_###/000 objectand choose Make Work Part.

Step 6: Save the 5004_### part.

Choose Save .

Step 7: Use the Assembly Navigator to make the 5000_### the Work Part.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 6-3

Page 238: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

In the Assembly Navigator, right-click the 5000_###/000 objectand choose Make Work Part.

Step 8: Save the 5000_### assembly.

Choose Save .

Step 9: Turn off Save Teamcenter Vis Data Option.

Choose File→Options→Save Options.

Toggle off the Save Teamcenter Vis Data option.

Choose OK.

Step 10: Close All Parts.

Step 11: Observe 3D visualization data in Portal.

From Portal, locate and view the DirectModel dataset for the5003_###/000 object.

Locate and view the DirectModel dataset for the 5004_###/001object.

Locate and view the DirectModel dataset for the 5000_###/000object. Does it exist?

Send the 5000_### object to PSE and view the assembly inPSE.

Hint: Click the Show/Hide Data Panel icon in PSE .

This concludes the activity.

6-4 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 239: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Using Part Export Directories

In addition to storing the actual Unigraphics NX part files in the database,you can store other sorts of files with your part files.

For example, you can store shaded image files or files related to theManufacturing operation with your part file.

These additional Unigraphics NX files are known as "associated" or"dependent" files. Each part file may have several dependent files of differingtypes.

When you open the Unigraphics NX part, these dependent files areautomatically sent to the export directory for use by Unigraphics NX. Whenyou save the part, the system prompts you to select the files you would liketo have re-imported.

When you close your part, the temporary export directory is deleted.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 6-5

Page 240: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

How NX Manager Unigraphics stores Dependent Files

To enable you to access the files associated with a particular part (which mustbe the work part at some time during your session), NX Manager Unigraphicsexports the work part’s dependent files from the database to a local directory,known as the export directory. NX Manager Unigraphics creates one exportdirectory for each work part in your current session.

• The export directory is deleted when the part is closed.

• If you change the work part, a new export directory is created (if one doesnot already exist) for that work part.

• The name of the export directory is based upon the part number of thepart which contains the dependent files.

• You can modify the dependent files or create new ones. When you performa Save or Close operation,

NX Manager Unigraphics asks you which new or changed files you want toimport from the export directory back into the database.

6-6 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 241: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Dataset Files (Named References)

In Teamcenter Engineering, datasets can manage several different file types.These file types are called the named references of that dataset.

Selecting a dataset and choosing View→Named References... displays theNamed References dialog for that dataset. You can use this dialog to view ormodify the named references (files) for the selected dataset.

The Cut, Copy and Paste icons in the Named References dialog are used tocut, copy and paste object references between two Named References dialogs.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 6-7

Page 242: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Activity: Creating 2D Visualization Data

In this activity, you will create 2D Visualization data for the Shaft.

Step 1: Create a GIF file for the 5003_### Shaft UGMASTER.

In Unigraphics NX, open the 5003_###-000 master part file.

Choose File→Export→GIF....

Choose OK.

Step 2: Save the Part.

Choose Save .

The Import Files for Part dialog appears.

Select the GIF File and choose OK.

The File is imported into the database.

Step 3: View the GIF file in Portal.

In My Navigator, expand the 5003_###- Shaft Item and ItemRevision.

Select the 5003_###-000 UGMASTER Dataset.

6-8 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 243: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Datasets are the only Teamcenter Engineeringobjects with Named References.

Choose View→Named References....

The Named References window appears.

You will see the GIF file you created previously.

Choose Close.

Step 4: Create a CGM file for the 5003_### Shaft Drawing in a directoryspecified by your Instructor.

In Unigraphics NX, open the 5003_###/000 ShaftManifestation, DWG5003_###.

Choose File→Export→CGM....

The Export CGM dialog appears.

Navigate to a directory in which you have Write access andenter 5003_###_sh1.cgm in the File name field.

Choose OK.

The Export CGM dialog appears.

Toggle the Source to Drawing.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 6-9

Page 244: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Choose OK.

Step 5: Get the Drawing Sheet into Teamcenter Engineering.

In My Navigator, select the 5003_###/000-Shaft Item Revisionand choose File→New→Dataset....

The New Dataset dialog appears.

Click More... to display additional Dataset types.

Scroll down the list to select DrawingSheet.

In the Name field, enter DWG5003_###/000.

6-10 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 245: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Choose the Import File icon .

Navigate to the directory in which you saved the CGM file.

Select 5003_###_sh1.cgm and choose Import.

Choose OK.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 6-11

Page 246: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

The file is created.

Select the DWG5003_###/000 dataset and click the Viewer tab.

The Drawing is displayed.

This concludes the activity.

6-12 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 247: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Activity: Creating Dependent Files

In this activity, you will create a shaded image and associate it to your part.You will also view the Named References of a Dataset.

Step 1: In Unigraphics NX, open your 5000_### Caster assembly file .

Step 2: Create a shaded image.

Choose View→Visualization→High Quality Image...).

The High Quality Shading dialog appears.

Choose Start Shade.

Choose Save (from the High Quality Image dialog).

The Save Image dialog appears.

Choose OK to accept image filename.

Cancel the High Quality Image dialog.

Step 3: Save your part file and import the image file.

Choose Save .

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 6-13

Page 248: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Choose Import All Files to import the TIF file into the database.

Step 4: View the Named References of the dataset.

In My Navigator, expand the 5000_###- Caster Assy Item andItem Revision.

Select the 5000_###-000 UGMASTER Dataset.

Datasets are the only Teamcenter Engineeringobjects with Named References.

Choose View→Named References....

The Named References window appears.

You will see the TIF file you created previously.

Choose Close.

6-14 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 249: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Step 5: Close all parts in Unigraphics NX.

Choose File→Close→All Parts.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 6-15

Page 250: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Dataset Versions

When changes are made to datasets, new dataset versions are created inTeamcenter Engineering. You can use these versions to track changes andundo changes by reverting to a previous version of the dataset using File→Open....

Selecting a dataset and choosing File→Open... displays the Open... dialog.You can specify a particular version of a dataset and/or a specific softwareapplication (tool) to use for the current editing session.

6-16 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 251: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Key Points

Following are some key points about dataset versions:

• As work progresses and you successively modify a particular dataset,new versions are added to the database but version-0 always referencesthe latest version of the dataset.

• The default version is the latest. In most cases, you should work withthis version unless you have some specific reason to open an earlierversion. This might be the case if you want to undo changes made inthe latest version.

• Normally, you only see the version-0 dataset in the My Navigatorworkspace area; Teamcenter Engineering hides other dataset versions toreduce clutter.

• Teamcenter Engineering manages multiple dataset versions until theversion limit is reached.

When the version limit is exceeded, the earliest version of the dataset ispurged from the database in order to make room for the new version.

A Note about Search Options

The Latest Dataset Versions toggle on the Search Options dialog can be usedto either show or hide dataset versions in search results. Set the toggle on ifyou want to show dataset versions.

By default, the toggle is off.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 6-17

Page 252: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Activity: Open an Earlier Version of a Part Dataset

In this activity, you will use File→Open... to open an earlier version of aUnigraphics NX part.

Step 1: Open the 5003_### part in Unigraphics.

From My Navigator, expand the My Parts folder.

Expand the 5003_###/000 Shaft Item Revision.

Select the UGMASTER dataset and choose the Start/Open

in UG icon .

Step 2: Start the Modeling Application.

Choose Application→Modeling... or choose the Modeling icon

.

Step 3: Add a chamfer to the bottom edge of the Shaft.

Choose the Chamfer icon Insert→Feature Operation→Chamfer.

The Chamfer menu appears.

Choose Single Offset.

Choose the bottom edge of the small cylinder.

Choose OK on the Chamfer dialog.

Enter the Offset value of .125.

6-18 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 253: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Choose OK on the Chamfer dialog.

Since you do not want to create another chamfer, chooseCancel on the Chamfer dialog.

Step 4: Save and Close All Parts.

Step 5: Open a previous version of the 5003 Shaft part.

Go to the My Navigator application in Teamcenter Engineering.

Expand the My Parts folder and the 5003_###/000 Shaft ItemRevision until you can see the 5003_###-000 UGMASTER.

Select the 5003_###-000 UGMASTER and chooseFile→Open....

This displays the Open... dialog.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 6-19

Page 254: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Select the next to the last (second highest) version of the5003_###-000 UGMASTER from the pull-down menu.

After selecting the desired version of the part, scroll down thelist of tools until you see UGII V10-All.

Expand the UGII V10-All tool, select the UG data icon andchoose OK.

An information window displays, informing you that an earlyversion of the part is loaded.

6-20 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 255: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Close the Information window.

An earlier version of the Shaft is now displayed. Notice theChamfer is gone.

Step 6: Save and Close all parts.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 6-21

Page 256: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Protecting Data Using Check-Out

Check-Out and Check-In procedures are used to ensure that two users do notsimultaneously update database objects. The ability to perform a check-outis important because, in a group write environment, users must protect thedata while they are working on it.

Implicit Check-Out

An Implicit Check-Out is performed automatically by the system.

Whenever you open a dataset to modify it, an implicit check-out isautomatically performed by Teamcenter Engineering. This means that thedataset cannot be modified by anyone else while you are working on it.

When you complete the modifications by closing the editing session, thedataset is automatically checked back into the database (the implicitcheck-out is reversed).

Explicit Check-Out

An Explicit Check-Out is performed manually by the user.

Following are characteristics of an Explicit Check-Out:

• Performing an Explicit Check-out locks a dataset against modifications byother users whether you are currently editing the file or not.

• While a dataset is Checked-Out, the user that performed the Check-Outhas write access, while other users have read access of the incrementalchanges.

• The Change ID field is used to correlate Checked-Out objects with pendingCM (Change Management) jobs. This field is optional.

6-22 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 257: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

• When checking-out a dataset, you can export the associated file to theoperating system at the same time using the Export Dataset on Checkouttoggle.

Performing an Explicit Check-out from NX Manager Unigraphics

You can perform a manual (explicit) Check-In and Check-Out using theAssembly Navigator in NX Manager Unigraphics.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 6-23

Page 258: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Activity: Perform Explicit Check-Out for Unigraphics NX Data

In this activity, you will explicit Check-Out the 5555_###-Wheel Drawingand UGMASTER using the Assembly Navigator.

Step 1: Open your 5555_###/000–Wheel Drawing and UGMASTER inUnigraphics NX.

Opening the Drawing automatically opens theUGMASTER.

Step 2: Click on the Assembly Navigator icon to display the AssemblyNavigator.

Step 3: Check-Out the Wheel DWG and UGMASTER using the AssemblyNavigator.

In the Assembly Navigator window, highlight both the DWGand UGMASTER.

Right-click and choose Check-Out.

The Status line indicates that the Part is Checked Out.

Step 4: Observe the result in Portal.

In My Navigator, select the 5555_###/000–Wheel ItemRevision and select the Properties tab.

Scroll to the right in the Properties table to view the COcolumn.

6-24 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 259: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Notice the check mark which indicates the datasets arecurrently checked out.

Step 5: In Unigraphics NX, save the drawing.

Choose Save .

View the result in the CO column in the My Navigatorapplication.

The datasets are still checked out. Saving the part does notcheck them back in.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 6-25

Page 260: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Step 6: Check-In the Wheel DWG and UGMASTER using the AssemblyNavigator.

In the Assembly Navigator window, highlight both the DWGand UGMASTER.

Right-click and choose Check-In.

The Status line indicates that the Part is Checked In.

Step 7: Observe the result in Portal.

In My Navigator, select the 5555_###/000–Wheel ItemRevision and select the Properties tab.

Scroll to the right in the Properties table to view the COcolumn.

Select the two datasets in the table and choose View→ Refresh.

6-26 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 261: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Notice the check marks which indicate the part and drawingare currently checked out are gone.

Step 8: In Unigraphics, Close all Parts.

Choose File→Close→All Parts.

Choose Yes.

Step 9: Log off from Unigraphics NX.

Choose File→Exit.

Choose Yes.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 6-27

Page 262: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Activity: Perform Implicit Check-Out of Unigraphics NX Data

In this activity, you will observe the Implicit (automatic) Check-Out/In ofUnigraphics NX data.

Step 1: Open the 5003_### Shaft UGMASTER.

Step 2: Rotate the WCS.

Choose WCS→Rotate....

Choose OK to accept the default (+ZC Axis: XC→YC,Angle=90).

Step 3: Observe the result in Portal.

In My Navigator, select the 5003_###/000 Item Revision andchoose the Properties tab.

Scroll to the right in the Properties table to view the COcolumn.

Notice the check mark which indicates the part is beingmodified and is currently checked out. This is an ImplicitCheck-Out.

6-28 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 263: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Step 4: In Unigraphics NX, Save the Part.

Choose Save .

View the result in the CO column in the My Navigatorapplication.

The part is still checked out. Saving the part does not checkit back in.

Step 5: In Unigraphics NX, Close all Parts.

Choose File→ Close→ All Parts.

Choose OK.

In My Navigator, select the UGMASTER dataset and chooseView→ Refresh.

Now that the part is closed, it is no longer checked out.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 6-29

Page 264: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Step 6: Log off from NX Manager Unigraphics.

Choose File→Exit.

Choose Yes.

This concludes the activity.

6-30 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 265: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

CAD Integration - Visualization & Dataset Management

Summary

The following topics were covered in this lesson:

• To create 3D visualization data from the CAD interface, chooseFile→Options→Save Options, and the Save Options dialog displays:

• Toggle on the Save Teamcenter Vis Data option and choose OK to generatethe Teamcenter Vision .jt files when a part is saved.

• Visualization data can be generated for piece parts only (not assemblies).

• Performing a Check-Out locks a dataset against modifications by otherusers.

• While a dataset is Checked-Out, the user that performed the Check-Outhas write access, while other users have read access of the incrementalchanges.

• Check-In checks the part back in so others can check it out.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 6-31

Page 266: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9
Page 267: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Lesson

7 Viewing Product Structurewith PSE

Purpose

The purpose of this lesson is to demonstrate how to view Product Structureusing the Product Structure Editor (PSE) application.

Objective

Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

• Identify an Item as an assembly

• View Product Structure

• Print product structure using PSE

• Perform a Product Structure Compare

• Visualize an Assembly in PSE

• Change Revision Rules and view the results in PSE

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7-1

Page 268: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

What is Product Structure Editor (PSE)?

The Product Structure Editor (PSE) is the application within TeamcenterEngineering for creating, viewing and modifying product structure and itsassociated occurrence data.

PSE Capabilities

You can use PSE to perform the following functions:

• Browse Product Structure - Allows you to see what the assemblystructure of a product looks like, to navigate around it easily, and findcomponents whose location in the structure is not known.

• Build and Edit Structure - PSE offers a simple way of quickly creatingand modifying structure using Cut, Copy and Paste.

• Compare Structures - Two product structures can be compared tohighlight any changes.

• Configuration of Product Structure - You can set rules to determinewhich revisions of components are configured, which variant is configured,or which components are effective.

• Load data in Unigraphics NX - PSE allows you to load selectedcomponents of the assembly in Unigraphics NX.

• Protects data from concurrent changes - If another user is editing anassembly (single level) within the product structure, you are preventedfrom making changes until the other user has saved their changes.

7-2 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 269: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

The BOM View Revision Object

When an Item is an assembly, you will see a BOMView Revision object thatexists for the Item Revision object.

The BOMView Revision object symbol, , identifies the BOMView Revisionobject.

BOM View Revisions are used to manage product structure for Item Revisions.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7-3

Page 270: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

BOM View Types

Teamcenter Engineering comes with a single Type of BOM View. Somecompanies extend or rename the BOM View Types in their system.

The example below was developed for this training material.

• view – The engineering or design bill of material is defined using the viewBOM View type. The system has been set up such that this type of BOMView is automatically created when a CAD assembly file is saved in thesystem. This BOM structure of the product is often "functional" in nature.Engineering/Design will define a product structure that best supportstheir product development and change processes.

• assembly– The view BOM does not always reflect the actual assemblybuild-up sequence of the product for manufacturing. The assemblyBOM View Type exists to define the structure of the product as it isactually manufactured. Additional entries for tools and manufacturingconsumables may be listed in the assembly BOM that are not listed inthe view BOM.

7-4 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 271: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Launching PSE

To view assembly structure, select the BOMView Revision object and chooseOpen . This launches the PSE application for the selected Item Revision.

You can also launch PSE from the shortcut menu by selecting thedesired Item or Item Revision, then right-click and choose SendTo→ PSE.

When you launch PSE, the menus and toolbar include options specific tothe PSE application.

The Revision Rule setting for the currently loaded BOMView Revision objectdisplays to the right of the Item Revision name, in the line above the columnheadings.

In this example, the Revision Rule is Latest.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7-5

Page 272: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

PSE Display

PSE displays the product structure in an indented BOM format similar tothose used in many CAD and ERP systems.

The product structure is displayed graphically with each component (line inthe BOM) represented by a Node.

By looking at the PSE Display, you can see which parts are piece parts andwhich parts are assemblies. If a node has a + sign next to it, this means it isan assembly and can be expanded by clicking on the + sign.

7-6 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 273: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Modifying Columns in PSE

You can modify the columns in PSE by Removing/Inserting columns or byclicking a column header and dragging it to a new location.

You can also print the display by right-clicking and selecting PrintTable.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7-7

Page 274: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Printing the BOM

To print the BOM, select an object (i.e. the 1600/000 in the BOM Line) andthen choose File→Print.

You can also print the BOM using File→Print....

7-8 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 275: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Activity: Viewing Product Structure in PSE

In this activity, you will get familiar with PSE.

Step 1: In My Navigator, search for the 6120-Skate Assembly, Right Item.

Step 2: Launch PSE for the 6120/000 Skate Assembly, Right ItemRevision.

In My Navigator, expand the 6120-Skate Assembly, RightItem.

To see the BOMView Revision object, expand the6120/000-Skate Assembly, Right Item Revision.

Select the BOMView Revision object and choose Open.

This brings up the PSE display.

How many 6120 first level components are piece parts and howmany are sub-assemblies?

Parts _________________________________________

Sub-Assemblies ________________________________

Step 3: Expand the 3120//000-Boot Assembly, Right Item.

Click the + sign to expand the 3120/000-Boot Assembly,Right Item.

Step 4: View the Toolbar icons and pull-down menus in PSE.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7-9

Page 276: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Move your cursor over the Tool bar icons to see the nameof each icon.

Left-click to pull-down and view the options available fromthe PSE menus.

Step 5: Change the size of the some of the PSE column displays bydragging the sash bars.

You can modify the columns in PSE byRemoving/Inserting columns or by clicking a columnheader and dragging it to a new location.

This concludes the activity.

7-10 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 277: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Release Status Review

Release Status Review

Each Item Revision has a Release Status property. The Release Status ofan Item Revision is shown in My Navigator in the Release Status column ofthe Properties table.

You can also view Release Status for an Item Revision by looking at the ItemRev Status column in the PSE window.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7-11

Page 278: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

List of Status Types

Following is a list of possible values for Release Status:

• Released – Data stored with Item Revisions that have obtained thisstatus are considered "Production" data. The data is in a "write-protected"mode meaning it cannot be changed unless a new revision letter is created.

• Pre-Released – Data stored with Item Revisions that have obtained thisstatus are also in a write-protected mode and cannot be changed unlessa new revision letter is created, however, the data is not intended forproduction use. The Designer or Engineer can arbitrarily apply thisstatus to freeze the data for use for building prototypes or for providingpreliminary data to customers and suppliers.

• ECPending – Data stored with Item Revisions that have obtained thisstatus are not in a write-protected mode and can still be changed. Thisstatus informs the consumer of the data that this revisions is currentlyin an Engineering Change process. At the successful completion of theprocess, the Release Status value will change to "Released".

• (Empty Value) – If the Item Revision has no value for status, it is said tobe "Working" data. That means someone is currently working on the datacontained in the revision.

• Approved – For Documents only.

This list of Release Status types is an example developed for thistraining material. Your company may have a different list ofpossible Release Status values with different meanings.

7-12 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 279: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Revision Rules

Revision Rules are parameters you set to determine which Item Revisionsare displayed for an Item.

The Revision Rule keys off the value of the Release Status for the ItemRevisions that exist for an Item.

By changing the Revision Rule, you can display different configurationsof an assembly.

In PSE, the current Revision Rule setting displays to the right of the ItemRevision name, in the line above the column headings.

In this example, the Revision Rule is Latest.

The following table shows two examples of Revision Rules:

Revision Rule Details

Latest Working, Has Status

Released Has Status, Working

Your system administrator configures the Revision Rules for yoursite.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7-13

Page 280: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

List of Revision Rules

The Revision Rules used for this training material are:

• Any Status – loads the latest Statused revisions or, if none exist, theWorking revisions of data.

• Latest – loads the latest Item Revision regardless of its Release Status.With this rule in effect, you will be able to view Work-In-Progress ItemRevisions.

• Released – loads the latest Item Revision with a Release Status of"Released." With this rule in effect, you will only view Item Revisionsthat have been released.

• Precise Only – loads the specific Item Revision that was in effect thelast time the assembly Item Revision was saved. If newer revisions ofthe components of the assembly have been created since the last time theassembly was saved, they will not display regardless of wether theyhave a Release Status value or not.

• Released; Config by Date – Loads the Item Revision with a ReleaseStatus of "Released" and an effectivity range that includes the datespecified by the user by using Tools→Revision Rule→Set Date/Unit/EndItem....

This list of Revision Rules is an example developed for this trainingmaterial. Your company may have a different list of Revision Rules.

7-14 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 281: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Revision Display Filter

The Revision Display Filter in My Navigator can be used to configure whichItem Revisions display for an Item, based on established Revision Rules.

To access the Revision Display Filter, select an Item object and choose SendTo→My Navigator.

This launches the My Navigator tri-pane window, shown below:

The tri-pane window displays the Item tree (upper-left panel) and ItemRevision tree (lower-left panel), as well as the standard My Navigator tabs.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7-15

Page 282: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Key Points

Following are some key points about the tri-pane window:

• The Item Tree (upper-left panel) is a graphical display of a single Itemreference and its associated objects, including all Item Revisions.

• The Item Revision Tree (lower left panel) is a graphical display of a singleItem Revision reference and its associated objects.

• You can sort through numerous Item Revisions using the Revision Display

Filters you can access via the Revision Selection button .

• You can also view the Properties, Viewer, or Referencers tab informationfor the object.

7-16 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 283: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Revision Display Filters

Choose the Revision Selection button to display the Revision Selectiondialog, shown below:

Using this dialog, you can select a revision filter option from the Revisiondisplay filter pull-down list, shown below:

You can also use the three Revision Filter buttons, described below, to filterthe Item Revisions display:

• Filters the Item Revisions to those that are Released.

• Filters the Item Revisions to those that are In-Process.

• Filters the Item Revisions to those that are Working.

In the results list, you can double-click an object to display it in the ItemRevision Tree (lower left panel) or you can select and copy an object to theclipboard for use in other Teamcenter Engineering applications.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7-17

Page 284: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Default Revision Rule Setting

When you log on to the system, a Revision Rule is in effect that controls whichItem Revisions you see listed when you view product structure (BOM). Yourdefault Revision Rule has been set up by your system administrator.

Your default Revision Rule setting can be changed using Edit→Options→PSE.If desired, you can use this dialog to change your default Revision Rulesetting to another available rule.

7-18 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 285: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Setting an Ad Hoc Revision Rule

Instead of changing your default revision rule, you also have the capabilityto change the Revision Rule in effect on an "as needed" or "ad-hoc" basis.To change the Revision Rule while viewing Product Structure, chooseTools→Revision Rules→View/Set Current from the PSE pull-down menu bar.

You can also change the Revision Rule by choosing the Revision

Rule icon in the PSE window.

The View/Set Current Revision Rule dialog displays showing the list ofavailable Revision Rules. You can select the desired rule and choose OK.

The corresponding change to the assembly is displayed in the PSE window.

Your system administrator can add, remove or modify existingRevision Rules for your site.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7-19

Page 286: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Activity: Changing a Revision Rule

In this activity, you will view the 1510 Wheel Assy BOM while changingRevision Rules to see which Item Revisions are configured.

Step 1: Search for the 1510-Wheel Assy.

Step 2: View the Product Structure window for the 1510-Wheel Assy.

Highlight the 1510-Wheel Assy Item object and choose SendTo→PSE.

The Product Structure window displays. This shows thecomponents that make up the Wheel Assembly.

Notice the 1503/002 Wheel does not have a value in theItem Rev Status column. This is because the ReleaseStatus value is currently Working.

As indicated in the window frame, the Revision Rule is currentlyset to Latest. This setting permits the loading of components inthe following order of precedence:

Working components

Components containing a Release Status (of any type)

Step 3: Change the Revision Rule to Released and view the results.

Choose the Revision Rule icon on the PSE Tool bar.

7-20 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 287: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Choose Released.

Choose OK.

Notice that the configured revision of the 1503 Revision Itemobject is now 000.

Step 4: Change Revision Rule to Any Status and view the results.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7-21

Page 288: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Notice that the configured revision of the 1503 Item Revisionobject is now 001.

Step 5: Change Revision Rule to Latest and view the results.

Notice that the configured revision of the 1503 Item Revisionobject is now 002.

Step 6: Close the PSE application.

This concludes the activity.

7-22 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 289: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Item Data Consumption While BOM Browsing

While browsing the BOM of a product, you may need to find out more specificinformation about individual components of the assembly.

For example, while exploring the 1600/000 BOM, you come across the1250/001-Axle and want to view its drawing.

Select the 1250/001-Axle and send it to the My Navigator application. Then,select the DWG1250/- drawing object and choose the Viewer tab to viewthe drawing.

You can also select and view any other files (dataset) or form data associatedwith the Item Revision.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7-23

Page 290: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Activity: Viewing Item Data from PSE

In this activity, you will find and view BOM of the 1600 Wheel Assembly andthen view file and form data of one of the 1600 components.

Step 1: In My Navigator, Search for the 1600-Wheel Assy.

Step 2: Copy and Paste a reference to the 1600-Wheel Assy into yourItems folder.

Step 3: Open the 1600-Wheel Assy in PSE.

Expand the 1600-Wheel Assy Item and Item Revision.

Select the 1600/000-view BOMView Revision object and chooseOpen.

This launches a PSE window showing the Product Structure forthe 1600/000-view BOMView Revision.

7-24 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 291: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Step 4: Change the Revision Rule to Released and view the results.

Choose the Revision Rule icon (or Tools→RevisionRule→View/Set Current).

Select Released and choose OK.

Notice that the configured revision of the 1250 Axle is now 000.

Step 5: View the Vis data for the 1600/000-Wheel Assy.

In PSE, choose the Show/Hide Data Panel icon .

Click the check-box for the 1600/000-Wheel Assy (view).

The Wheel Assy displays in the Viewer window.

Step 6: View the drawing for the 1250 Axle component.

Select the 1250/000-Axle component.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7-25

Page 292: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Right-click and choose Send To→ My Navigator.

The contents of the 1250/000 Item Revision are displayed,including the drawing data.

Select the DWG1250/- drawing object and choose the Viewertab to view the drawing.

Step 7: View the Item Revision Master form data of the 1250/000-AxleItem Revision.

Select the 1250/000 Item Revision Master form object.

Choose the Viewer tab.

7-26 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 293: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

The Item Revision Master Form displays in the Viewer.

Step 8: Display your Home folder in Navigator.

Choose the Open Home Folder icon .

Step 9: Close the PSE window.

Choose File→Close from the PSE menu bar.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7-27

Page 294: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Opening Multiple Product Structures in PSE

The PSE application can have multiple product structures opensimultaneously. If you have opened multiple BOMView Revision objects, youcan use the Select Visible Window icon to toggle back and forth between theopened product structures.

Choosing the Select Visible Window icon displays the List of availablewindows dialog, shown below:

In this example, both the view and assembly product structures for an Itemare open in PSE at the same time.

Double-clicking the structure line item in this dialog changes which structureyou are working with in the main PSE window.

7-28 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 295: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

By selecting two structures from this dialog and choosing the Display

side-by-side button , you can view both structures in the PSEapplication at the same time, as shown below:

The black border denotes which side-by-side window is currently active.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7-29

Page 296: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Activity: Viewing Types of Product Structure

In this activity, you will view both the assembly and view BOM data for asingle Item.

Step 1: In My Navigator, expand the 1600/000-Wheel Assy.

Notice there are two BOMView Revision objects.

Step 2: Select the 1600/000-view BOMView Revision object and chooseOpen.

This launches a PSE window showing the Product Structure forthe 1600/000-view BOMView Revision.

Step 3: Launch a second PSE window for the 1600/000-assemblyBOMView Revision object.

Return to the My Navigator application.

Select the 1600/000-assembly BOMView Revision and chooseOpen.

This loads that view in PSE and replaces the existing view loaded.

7-30 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 297: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Choose the Select Visible Window icon .

The List of available windows dialog displays.

Use the CTRL key to choose both entries in the list and choose

the Display side-by-side button .

This splits the PSE display showing the two product structuresside by side.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7-31

Page 298: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Step 4: Compare the two BOM displays.

Choose Tools→Compare....

Choose Single Level and choose OK.

7-32 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 299: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

What is different about the assembly BOMView Revision?

_________________________________________

Choose Tools→Clear Compare.

Close the PSE window.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7-33

Page 300: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Activity: Test Your Skills

Use the techniques presented in this Lesson to answer the followingquestions:

Step 1: How many components does it take to build a 5101 BrakeAssembly?

_________________________________________

Step 2: How many first level components exist in the 3510 Boot, AssyLeft as:

Parts _________________________________________

Sub-Assemblies _________________________________________

Step 3: What is the part number for the Spacer in the 1510/000 WheelAssy?

_________________________________________

Step 4: What is the difference between the 1510/000 and 1510/001 WheelAssemblies?

_________________________________________

This concludes the activity.

7-34 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 301: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Summary

When an Item is an assembly, you will see a BOM View Revision object thatexists for the Item Revision object.

• BOMView Revisions are used to manage product structure for ItemRevisions.

• Opening a BOMView Revision object launches PSE.

• The Product Structure Editor (PSE) is the application within TeamcenterEngineering for creating, viewing and modifying Product Structure andits associated occurrence data.

• From PSE, if you wish to view one of the parts in the BOM, you can sendthe desired Item Revision to My Navigator.

• Item Revision configuration using Revision Rules is done by reading theRelease Status of the revisions. Release Status is an attribute assigned toan object after the object successfully goes through a release.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 7-35

Page 302: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9
Page 303: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Lesson

8 Product Structure - CAD View

Purpose

The purpose of this lesson is to demonstrate how the Load Options Settingaffects which revisions of component parts are loaded by Unigraphics NXwhen you open an assembly.

Objective

Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

• Change the Load Options Revision Rule setting and view the resultingcomponents that get loaded in the assembly.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 8-1

Page 304: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - CAD View

Review of Release Status

A Status Type (or Release Status) can be set on almost any TeamcenterEngineering data upon completion of a release. An object’s properties reflectthe Release Status name and date. The following dialogs in TeamcenterEngineering show the value of an object’s Release Status:

Release Status and Release Date shown in My Navigator:

Revision Rules setting based on Release Status in PSE:

8-2 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 305: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - CAD View

Revision Rule set to Latest shows resulting Release Status in the Item RevStatus column in PSE:

Revision Rules used for Load Options in Unigraphics NX:

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 8-3

Page 306: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - CAD View

Configuring using Revision Rules

A Revision Rule is a method for evaluating which revision of a part should bechosen depending on certain criteria (for example, whether it has a particularapproval status).

In Unigraphics NX, Load Options are configured using Revision Rules todetermine which data to load into Unigraphics NX, based on Status Type.

List of Revision Rules

The Revision Rules used in this training material for Load Options are:

• Any Status - loads the latest released revisions or , if none exist, then theworking revisions.

• Latest - loads the latest Item Revision regardless of its Released Status.With this rule in effect, you will be able to view Work-In-Progress ItemRevisions.

• Precise Only - loads the specific Item Revision that was in effect thelast time the assembly Item Revision was saved. If newer revisions ofthe components of the assembly have been created since the last time theassembly was saved, they will not display regardless of wether theyhave a Release Status value or not.

• Released - loads the latest Item Revision with a Release Status of"Released". With this rule in effect, you will only view Item Revisionsthat have been released.

• Released; Config by Date - Loads the Item Revision with a ReleaseStatus of "Released" and an effectivity range that includes thedate specified by the user by using Tools→ Revision Rule→ SetDate/Unit/End Item....

8-4 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 307: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - CAD View

Load Options

When you open an assembly part file, the system must find and load anycomponent parts that are referenced by that assembly.

To access Load Options, choose File→Options→Load Options in UnigraphicsNX.

Load Options do not affect the actual part you are opening. LoadOptions only apply to any component parts that need to be loadedas part of the assembly.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 8-5

Page 308: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - CAD View

Activity: Configuring using Revision Rules

In this activity, you will change your Revision Rule setting and observe whichrevisions of component parts are loaded by Unigraphics NX when you openan assembly.

Step 1: Launch UG with no parts loaded. If UG is already running, closeall parts.

Step 2: Observe the default Revision Rules setting for Load Options.

Choose File→Options→Load Options.... The Load Optionsdialog is displayed.

Verify that Latest is selected.

Choose Cancel.

Step 3: Open the 1510 Wheel Assembly and observe the loadedcomponents.

In Unigraphics NX, choose Open.

In the Part Number field, enter 1510 and press ENTER.

The Part Revision 001 gets filled in automatically.

Choose OK to load the 1510/001 Wheel Assy.

8-6 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 309: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - CAD View

Choose OK on the Warning dialog.

Close the Information window.

Choose Assemblies→Reports→List Components.

The Component Report Information window appears.

Notice the 1503/002 part revision appears at the top of thelisting.

Close the Information window.

Step 4: You can also verify which components are loaded by selectingthe Assembly Navigator tab.

Select the Assembly Navigator tab .

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 8-7

Page 310: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - CAD View

Notice that the 1503/002 Revision of the Wheel is loaded in theassembly because the Revision Rule is set to Latest.

Step 5: Close all parts in Unigraphics NX.

Choose File→Close→All Parts.

Choose Yes on the Warning dialog.

Step 6: Change your Load Options to load the latest revision ofcomponents with Any Status in the assembly.

Choose File→Options→Load Options....

The Load Options dialog displays.

Choose the Any Status Revision Rule and choose OK.

Step 7: Open the 1510 Wheel Assembly and observe the loadedcomponents.

In Unigraphics NX, choose Open.

Expand the Find node for 1510.

Select the 1510 Wheel Assembly and choose OK.

8-8 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 311: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - CAD View

Choose OK on the Warning dialog.

Close the Information window.

Choose Assemblies→Reports→List Components.

The Component Report Information window appears.

Notice the 1503/001 part revision appears at the top of thelisting. This is because of the Revision Rule setting of AnyStatus.

Close the Information window.

Step 8: You can also verify which components got loaded by selecting the

Assembly Navigator tab .

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 8-9

Page 312: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - CAD View

Notice that the 1503/001 Revision of the Wheel is loaded in theassembly.

Step 9: Close all parts in Unigraphics NX.

Step 10: Change your Load Options to load the latest Released revision ofcomponents in an assembly.

Choose File→Options→Load Options.... The Load Optionsdialog is displayed.

Choose the Released Revision Rule and choose OK.

Step 11: Open the 1510 Wheel Assembly and observe the loadedcomponents.

In Unigraphics NX, choose Open.

Expand the Find node for 1510.

Select the 1510 Wheel Assy.

Choose OK.

Close the Information window.

8-10 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 313: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - CAD View

Choose OK on the Warning dialog.

Choose Assemblies→Reports→List Components.

The Component Report Information window appears.

Notice the 1503/000 part revision appears at the top of thelisting. The 1503/000 has a status of Released.

Step 12: View the Assembly Navigator.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 8-11

Page 314: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - CAD View

Step 13: Close all parts in Unigraphics NX.

Step 14: Change your Load Options to load the As Saved revision ofcomponents in an assembly.

Choose File→Options→Load Options....

Choose the Load As Saved option at the top of the dialog.

Choose OK.

Step 15: Open the 1510 Wheel Assembly and observe the loadedcomponents.

In Unigraphics NX, choose Open.

Expand the Find node for 1510.

Select the 1510 Wheel Assy.

The 001 Part Revision is filled in.

Choose OK.

Choose OK on the Warning dialog.

Close the Information window.

Choose Assemblies→Reports→List Components.

The Component Report Information window appears.

8-12 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 315: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - CAD View

Notice that the 1503/000 Revision of the Wheel is loaded in theassembly.

Step 16: Exit Unigraphics NX.

Choose File→ Close→ All Parts.

Choose Yes on the Warning dialog.

Choose File→ Exit.

Choose Yes on the Exit dialog.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 8-13

Page 316: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - CAD View

Summary

A Status Type (or Release Status) can be set on almost any TeamcenterEngineering data upon completion of a release.

• An objects properties reflect the Release Status by name and the ReleaseDate.

• A Revision Rule is a method for evaluating which revision of a part shouldbe chosen depending on certain criteria (for example, whether it has aparticular approval status).

• When you open an assembly part file, the system must find and loadcomponent parts that are referenced by that assembly. Load Options letyou specify how the system loads your part files.

8-14 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 317: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Lesson

9 Where Used and WhereReferenced

Purpose

In this lesson, you will perform a Where Referenced and Where Used search.

Objective

Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

• Perform a Where Referenced search

• Perform a Where Used search

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 9-1

Page 318: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Where Used and Where Referenced

Performing a Where Referenced Search

A Where Referenced search is useful for finding parts and specificationsrelated to an object.

Suppose you want to find all locations where the BBDS5453 Axle, HighSpeed Design Specification is being referenced. To do this, select theBBDS5453/000-Axle, High Speed Document Revision and choose theReferencers tab. Set the Where pull-down list to Referenced.

The results of the Where Referenced query is a list of all objects that arerelated to the Design Specification.

9-2 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 319: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Where Used and Where Referenced

Key Points

Following are some key points about Where Referenced search results:

• Where Referenced displays are connected with blue links.

• The Referencers tab allows you to perform either a Where Used or WhereReferenced search in the same display.

• The relationships are displayed graphically in the Referencers window.

• You can perform iterative expansions of References by double-clicking anobject in the Referencers window graphical display.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 9-3

Page 320: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Where Used and Where Referenced

Activity: Perform a Where Referenced Search

In this activity, you will perform a Where Referenced search on theBBDS5453 Design Specification document.

Step 1: Go to the Items folder in My Navigator.

Step 2: Expand the BBDS5453-Axle, High Speed Document.

Step 3: Select the BBDS5453/000-Axle, High Speed Document Revision.

Step 4: Use Where Referenced to query the system to locate all partsaffected by the Design Specification.

Choose the Referencers tab and set the Where pull-down listto Referenced.

If necessary, double-click the BBDS5453/000-Axle,High Speed Document Revision in the Referencerswindow to expand the view of object references.

9-4 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 321: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Where Used and Where Referenced

Step 5: Find and expand the 1510-Wheel Assy Item.

Notice that there are two revisions, 000 and 001.

Next, you will perform a Where Referenced search to find out whythe 001 Revision was necessary.

Close the Search window.

Step 6: Perform a Where Referenced search on the 1510/001-Wheel AssyItem Revision.

Select the 1510/001-Wheel Assy Item Revision and click theReferencers tab.

Set the Where pull-down list to Referenced.

If necessary, double-click the 1510/001-Wheel AssyItem Revision in the Referencers window to expandand view the object references.

This gives you a list of objects that currently contain areference to the selected Item Revision.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 9-5

Page 322: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Where Used and Where Referenced

One of the referenced objects is an Engineering ChangeRevision. Viewing the CN Engineering Change object in CMViewer gives you information about why the new revisionwas necessary.

Step 7: Return to your Home folder.

This concludes the activity.

9-6 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 323: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Where Used and Where Referenced

Performing a Where Used Search

Perform a Where Used search to find assemblies that use the selected Item.

Suppose you want to find assemblies where the 1503-Wheel is being used.Highlight the 1503-Wheel Item and choose the Referencers tab. Set theWhere pull-down list to Used and double-click the 1503-Wheel Item in theReferencers window.

This shows that both the 1510/000 and 1510/001 Wheel Assemblies usethe 1503-Wheel Item.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 9-7

Page 324: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Where Used and Where Referenced

Where Used Options

To specify the depth of the output results, choose an option from the Depthpull-down list. The options to display include One Level, All Levels, or theTop Level assembly.

Performing a Where Used search with the Depth set to All Levels shows allthe Item Revisions that have the selected Item as a component.

Performing a Where Used search with the Depth set to Top Level shows onlythe top-level assembly that uses the selected Item, as shown below:

You can also specify a Revision Rule to use in the Where Used search byselecting a Revision Rule from the Where-Used Rule pull-down list.

9-8 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 325: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Where Used and Where Referenced

Key Points

Following are some key points about Where Used search results:

• Where Used displays are connected with red links.

• The Where-Used search results consist only of Item Revision objects.

• You can perform iterative expansions of Where Used search results bydouble-clicking objects displayed in the Referencers window.

• You can specify the depth of the output results — You can choose todisplay the Where Used results with only One Level, All Levels, or theTop Level assembly.

• You can specify the Revision Rule to use in the Where Used search byselecting a Revision Rule from the Where-Used Rule pull-down list.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 9-9

Page 326: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Where Used and Where Referenced

Activity: Perform a Where Used Search

In this activity, you will perform a Where Used search on the 1503-Wheel tosee where it is used.

Step 1: Find the 1503-Wheel Item.

Step 2: Perform a Where Used search on the 1503-Wheel Item.

Select the 1503-Wheel Item and choose the Referencers tab.

Verify the Where option is set to Used and the Depth optionis set to One Level.

If necessary, double-click on the 1503-Wheel icon in theReferencers window.

This shows you the next higher assemblies that use the Wheel.

Step 3: Perform a Where Used search on the 1510/001-Wheel Assy.

From the Where Used results display, double-click on the1510/001 Revision Item icon.

The 1510/001-Wheel Assy is used in the 2505/000-Frame Assy.

9-10 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 327: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Where Used and Where Referenced

Step 4: Perform a Where Used search on the 2505/000-Frame Assy.

From the Where Used results display, double-click on the2505/000 icon.

Continue doing this until you get to the top-level assembly.

You could also set the Depth to All Levels to getthe same result.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 9-11

Page 328: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Where Used and Where Referenced

Summary

• The Referencers application allows you to perform either a Where Usedor Where Referenced search in the same display. The relationships aredisplayed graphically.

• Perform a Where Referenced search to find out where a selected objectis being referenced. Where Referenced displays are connected with bluelinks.

• Perform a Where Used search to find assemblies that use the selectedItem Revision. You can choose to display the Where Used results withonly One Level, All Levels or the Top Level assembly. Where Useddisplays are connected with red links.

• You can perform iterative expansions of the search by double-clicking theobject icon in the Referencers window.

9-12 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 329: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Lesson

10 Product Structure -Create/Extend

Purpose

The purpose of this lesson is to create Bill of Material (BOM) data usingTeamcenter Engineering.

Objective

Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

• Build Structure using Product Structure Editor (PSE)

• Extend CAD created structure with Product Structure Editor (PSE)

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 10-1

Page 330: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Create/Extend

Building Structure

You can create structure using the following techniques:

• the New Item dialog

• the Copy and Paste options

• the Add... and Paste... options

Using Copy and Paste

Copying and pasting information into PSE is one method for buildingstructure. You can do the following:

• Copy more than one Item Revision to create several components at thesame time.

• Use the Paste option to take Items and Item Revisions from the clipboardand create components in an assembly in PSE.

• Select several target assemblies to add the components in one operation.

• Copy Items and Item Revisions from other Application windows andPaste them into a PSE window.

10-2 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 331: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Create/Extend

Using the Paste... dialog

If you want to paste a component multiple times, use the Paste... dialog. Thismethod pastes what is currently in your clipboard.

• Number of Occurrences corresponds to the number of times the partnumber is displayed in the BOM.

• Quantity per Occurrence is the quantity within each specified occurrence.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 10-3

Page 332: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Create/Extend

Using the Add... dialog

The Add... dialog is similar to the Paste... dialog.

The main difference is that the Paste... dialog pre-populates the Item ID(Revision) and Name fields with an Item (Revision) from the clipboard. UsingAdd... dialog you can specify a component by typing in the ID (rather thanpasting from the clipboard).

• Number of Occurrences corresponds to the number of separatecomponents that would be added.

• Quantity per Occurrence is the quantity that each single occurrencerepresents in the BOM.

To use Add... you must know the Part Number.

You can add multiple occurrences, as well as more than one quantity peroccurrence. For example, you might have 1 occurrence of a rivet witha Quantity per Occurrence of 50, or 2 occurrences of a rivet each with aquantity of 25.

10-4 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 333: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Create/Extend

Activity: Create Assembly Structure

In this activity, you will build a Recreational In-line Skate Assemblystructure.

Step 1: Change your Role to Product Engineer.

Step 2: Create a new recreational skate line top level Item.

Select your Items folder.

In Teamcenter Engineering, choose File→New→Item....

This displays the New Item dialog.

Step 3: Enter the Item ID, Revision, Name, and Description.

Select Item for Type.

Enter the Item ID=6205_###, where ### denotes a numberdesignated by your instructor.

Enter the Revision 000.

Enter the Name=Rec. Skate Assembly

Enter the Description=Recreational Skate Line

The Unit of Measure field, when left blank, implies"each."

Choose Finish to create the Item.

Choose Close to close the New Item dialog.

The new Item is placed in the Items folder.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 10-5

Page 334: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Create/Extend

Step 4: Start PSE on the top-level assembly.

Select the 6205_###-Rec. Skate Assembly Item.

Right-click and choose Send To→PSE.

The PSE application displays.

Step 5: Create the new Skate Assembly, Left Item.

In PSE, select the 6205_###/000 Rec. Skate Assembly.

Choose File→New→Item....

You can also use the CTRL-T key combination toaccess the New Item dialog and create the Item.

Select Item for Type.

In the Item ID field, enter 3210_###.

10-6 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 335: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Create/Extend

In the Rev field, enter 000.

In the Name field, enter Skate Assembly, Left.

Choose Finish to create the Item.

The new Item is placed in the 6205_###/000-Rec. Skate Assembly.

You may need to make the BOM Line column wider.

In the next Steps, make sure to highlight the correctnode when adding the Item. You can use Cut, Copy, andPaste to fix any mistakes, if necessary.

Step 6: Create the new Skate Assembly, Right Item.

Make sure the 6205_###/000-Rec. Skate Assembly is selected.

The New Item dialog is still displayed. Select Item for Typeand choose Next.

Enter the Item ID=3220_###.

Enter the Revision=000.

Enter the Name=Skate Assembly, Right.

Choose Finish to create the Item.

Choose Close to close the New Item window.

Step 7: Create the new Boot Assembly, Right Item.

Select the 3220_###/000-Skate Assembly, Right.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 10-7

Page 336: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Create/Extend

Use the CTRL-T key combination to access the New Item dialog.

Select Item for Type.

Enter the Item ID=3230_###

Enter the Revision=000.

Enter the Name=Boot Assembly, Right.

Choose Finish to create the Item.

The new Item is placed in the 3220_###/000-Skate Assembly,Right.

Choose Close to close the New Item dialog.

Select the 3220_### node and choose the + sign to expand it.

Step 8: Create the Liner, Shell, and Tongue Items inside the BootAssembly, Right.

Select the 3230_###/000-Boot Assembly, Right.

Use the CTRL-T key combination to access the New Item dialog.

Select Item for Type.

Enter the Item ID=3240_###.

Enter the Revision=000.

Enter the Name=Liner, Right.

Choose Finish to create the Item.

10-8 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 337: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Create/Extend

The New Item dialog is still displayed. Select Item for Typeand choose Next.

Enter the Item ID=3250_###.

Enter the Revision=000.

Enter the Name=Shell, Right.

Choose Finish to create the Item.

The New Item dialog is still displayed. Select Item for Typeand choose Next.

Enter the Item ID=3260_###.

Enter the Revision=000.

Enter the Name=Tongue, Right.

Choose Finish to create the Item.

Choose Close to close the New Item dialog.

Select the 3230_### node and choose the + sign to expand it.

At this point, your 6205_###/000-Rec. Skate Assembly shouldlook like the structure shown in the following diagram:

Step 9: Save the PSE.

Choose the Save icon.

Step 10: Add the 3102 Boot, Right Item to the Boot Assembly, Right.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 10-9

Page 338: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Create/Extend

In PSE, highlight the 3230_### node and choose Edit→Add....

In the Item ID field, enter 3102 and press ENTER.

The Add dialog is filled in with information about the 3102Item ID.

Choose Apply.

Step 11: Add the 3118 Collar to the Boot Assembly, Right.

With the Add dialog still displayed, enter 3118 in the ItemID field, and press ENTER.

Choose OK.

The 3118 Collar Item is placed inside the assembly.

At this point, your 6205_###/000-Rec. Skate Assemblyassembly should look like the structure in the followingdiagram.

10-10 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 339: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Create/Extend

Step 12: Save PSE.

Choose the Save icon.

Step 13: Find an existing Buckle Assembly by Name and add it to the BootAssembly, Right with a quantity of three (3).

Return to My Navigator and choose Search.

Select the Item... query from the drop-down list.

Choose More... to see all fields.

Choose Clear this query form.

In the Name field, enter Buckle Assembly.

Choose Execute this query.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 10-11

Page 340: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Create/Extend

Select the 4103-Buckle Assembly and choose Copy.

Return to the PSE application, select the 3230_###/000-BootAssembly, Right.

In the next action, be sure to select Edit→Paste...rather than Edit→Paste because this displays adifferent dialog.

Choose Edit→Paste...

Enter 3 in the Number of occurrences field.

Choose OK.

Three occurrences of the Buckle Assembly are added to the3230_###/000-Boot Assembly, Right.

10-12 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 341: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Create/Extend

At this point, your 6205_###/000-Rec. Skate Assembly shouldlook like the structure in the following diagram:

Step 14: Save PSE.

Choose the Save icon.

This saves your PSE window with the assembly you havebuilt so far.

Next, you will add an existing Brake Assembly to your6205_###/000-Rec. Skate Assembly. To demonstrate copyingstructure between two PSE windows, you will open a secondPSE window for the 6120/000-Skate Assembly, Right (whichcontains a Brake Assembly).

You will then Copy and Paste the structure of theBrake Assembly from the second PSE window into the6205_###/000-Rec. Skate Assembly PSE window.

Step 15: Find the 6120 Skate Assembly, Right and send it to PSE.

In My Navigator, search for the Item ID=6120.

Select the 6120-Skate Assembly, Right from the search results.Right-click and choose Send To→PSE.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 10-13

Page 342: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Create/Extend

Step 16: Create side-by-side PSE Views.

Choose the Select visible window icon.

The List of Available windows appears.

Highlight both Items in the Structure list and choose theDisplay windows side by side button.

10-14 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 343: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Create/Extend

Step 17: Copy the existing Brake Assembly into your Skate Assembly,Right.

In the 6120/000-Skate Assembly, Right, select the5101/000-Brake Assembly.

Choose Copy.

In your 6205_###/000-Rec. Skate Assembly, select your3220_###/000-Skate Assembly, Right.

Choose Paste.

Be careful with the next two actions.

In the upper right corner of the 6120/000-Skate Assembly,Right PSE window, click the x to close the window.

Choose the Save icon to save the 6205_### PSE window.

Step 18: Remove the Tongue from the Boot Assembly, Right (decide that itis not going to be used).

In the 6205_###/000-Rec. Skate Assembly window, select the3260_###/000-Tongue, Right.

Choose the Remove a line icon to remove this line fromthe BOM.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 10-15

Page 344: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Create/Extend

At this point, your 6205_###/000-Rec. Skate Assembly shouldlook like the structure in the following diagram:

Step 19: Save and Close PSE.

Choose the Save icon.

Choose File→Close in the PSE window.

This concludes the activity.

10-16 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 345: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Create/Extend

Activity: Complete Product Structure for Skate Line

In this activity, you will add the Frame Assembly to the Recreational SkateAssembly.

Step 1: Send the top level Rec. Skate Assembly to the PSE application.

In My Navigator, expand the Items folder to locate the6205_###-Rec. Skate Assembly Item.

Select the 6205_###-Rec. Skate Assembly Item. Right-clickand choose Send To→ PSE.

The PSE application displays.

Step 2: Add the Frame Assembly to the Skate Assembly, Right.

In My Navigator, search for the 2105-Frame Assembly.

Select the 2105-Frame Assembly Item.

Choose Copy.

In the PSE application select the 3220_###/000-SkateAssembly, Right.

Choose Paste.

Expand the 3220_###/000 node.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 10-17

Page 346: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Create/Extend

Step 3: Save PSE.

Choose File→Save.

This concludes the activity.

10-18 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 347: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Create/Extend

Summary

You can create product structure in PSE using the Add... and Paste... dialogs.

• The main difference between Add... and Paste... is that the Paste...dialog pre-populates the Item ID (Revision) and Name fields with anItem (Revision) from the clipboard.

• Using Add... you can specify a component by typing in the ID (ratherthan pasting from the clipboard).

• Number of Occurrences correponds to the number of separatecomponents that would be added.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 10-19

Page 348: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9
Page 349: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Lesson

11 Product Structure - Advanced

Purpose

The purpose of this lesson is to demonstrate some advanced features of PSE.

Objective

Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create and use Variant Data

• Create multiple BOMView Revision Types

• Create an Alternate Component

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11-1

Page 350: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Introduction to Variant Functionality

Variant Functionality allows you to create Options (for example, model) andthe allowed Values (for example, Flash, Glider) and associate these with anItem Revision.

Using Variant functionality, you can:

• Define a Variant Condition on those occurrences which are subject toVariant Rules.

For example, only load IF “Option model = Value Flash" is specifiedin the Variant Rule.

• Set a Variant Rule to configure a particular variant of the assemblyor product.

• Set Default Option values for the Variant Rule.

• Create Variant Rule Checks to specify Option values, or combinations ofvalues, that are not allowed.

Changes to variant data are controlled by being associated with ItemRevisions and BOMView Revisions using the usual methods in TeamcenterEngineering.

11-2 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 351: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Example of Variant Functionality

The following diagram illustrates the Variant functionalityas it applies to the Recreational Skate Assembly beingused throughout this lesson for examples and activities.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11-3

Page 352: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Creating Variant Data

The scenario described in this section illustrates the general procedure forcreating variant data. This same scenario is used for the activities you willcomplete in this lesson.

First, you create an Option named model on the Recreational Skate Line withallowed values of Flash, Glider, Streetsmart and Windrunner.

You define the Options using the Variants tab in PSE.

Having established the Options used to drive different configurations of theRecreational Skate Assembly, you then specify a variant condition on theShell component to configure it appropriately.

For the Shell component, you want a condition that says: only load thiscomponent if the model Option is set to a value of Streetsmart orWindrunner.

11-4 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 353: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

For example, Load IF model = Streetsmart OR Load IF model =Windrunner.

You have now created all the static variant data which is necessary toconfigure a variant BOM. These operations are typically performed by theengineering department or a specialized configuration department.

A specific Option value does not necessarily relate to a single component.Variant Conditions including a particular Option value can cause any numberof components, at different places in the BOM, to be configured or not. Thismakes the variant functionality very powerful and flexible.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11-5

Page 354: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Variant Data Location

Variant data is stored on the following objects:

On the Item Revision:

• Options and Allowed Values

• Fixed and Derived Default Values

• Variant Rule Checks

On the Occurrence:

• Variant Conditions

11-6 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 355: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Controlling Changes

Changes to variant data can have a dramatic effect on variant configuration.

The Variant Rule can be set by any user to configure a particular variant.It is up to those creating variant data to ensure that the necessary VariantRule Checks exist so that only valid rules can be set. Command Suppressioncan be used to remove the Variant Rule functionality from specified usersand groups.

Variant data is owned by a specific Revision of an Item. As the Item evolves,it may be necessary to change the set of allowed values for a particularOption, or possibly add further Options.

Finding out Where Variant Data is Located

• Options and Defaults - The Variant Rule indicates which Item Revisionthe Option is owned by and on which Item any Defaults have been set.

• Variant Data on Items - A “Y” in the HVD - Has Variant Data columnin PSE indicates an Item has variant data associated with it. You canuse the Option Defaults, Define Options or Variant Rule Check dialogs toview the associated variant data.

• Variant Components / Variant Conditions- The node for componentsthat have Variant Conditions displays a symbol and the VariantConditions column in the PSE application displays the condition.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11-7

Page 356: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Where Variant Data is Stored in the BOM

When populating a BOM with variant data, you will need to determine towhich assembly items the Options, Defaults and Variant Rule Checks shouldbe attached.

There are two broad kinds of variant data - data set by marketing orcustomers to specify the variant of the product they want, and data set byengineers to control more detailed variant information with which customersare not concerned.

Marketing data is probably best stored at the product level, which is thecontext for that kind of user. Engineering variant data is more likely to bestored at the lower levels on which engineers responsible for specific modulesor sub-assemblies work. Engineers are concerned with ensuring the correctcomponents get loaded for a particular Option and that invalid combinationscannot be configured.

Option Identification

Option names are not unique in the database, they are unique within theitem to which they are attached. Options are generally displayed with theirowning Item. You only need to specify an item when the Option is not unique.

11-8 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 357: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Activity: Add Options to Recreational Skate Line

In this activity, you will add Variant Options to your new RecreationalSkate Line.

Step 1: Go to the PSE application and select 6205_### Rec. SkateAssembly.

Step 2: On the Recreational Skate, add a Variant Option called "model"with the values of Flash, Glider, Streetsmart and Windrunner.

Click the Show/Hide Data Panel icon .

Click the Variants tab.

Choose the Show legacy, variant data tab panel icon ,located at the bottom of the tab panel.

The legacy Variant data tab panel displays.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11-9

Page 358: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Select Options from the Variants window.

Enter model in the Name field.

Enter various recreational skate models in the Descriptionfield.

Choose the Create icon .

Expand the Options list and highlight model.

11-10 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 359: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Enter Flash in the Value field.

Click the + icon to add Flash as an Option Value for model.

Enter Glider in the Value field and click the + icon.

Enter Streetsmart in the Value field and click the + icon.

Enter Windrunner in the Value field and click the + icon.

Choose the Modify option .

Choose the Save variant data icon .

Step 3: Specify Flash as the Option Default value for model.

Select Option Defaults from the Variants window.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11-11

Page 360: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

From the Option selector list, select [6205_###] model.

From the Value selector list, select Flash.

Choose the Create option default icon to create thedefault.

11-12 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 361: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

The Option Defaults value for the [6205_###] model is nowset to Flash.

Choose the Save icon to save your work.

Step 4: Create Variant Conditions on the Shell to load if the model isStreetsmart or Windrunner.

In the PSE window, expand the 3230-Boot, Assembly, Right.

Select your 3250_###/000 Shell in the PSE window.

Choose the Edit the variant condition icon .

The Variant Condition dialog appears.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11-13

Page 362: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Select the Option list from the middle of the Variant Conditionwindow and choose [6205_###] model.

Select Streetsmart from the Value list and choose the Append

icon .

Click the OR toggle.

Select Windrunner from the Value list and choose the Appendicon.

11-14 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 363: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

The Variant Conditions window should look like the following:

Choose OK.

Notice the symbol indicating that Variant Conditions existfor the Shell.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11-15

Page 364: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Step 5: Create Variant conditions on the Boot to load if the model isFlash or Glider.

Select the 3102_###/000 Boot, Right.

With the Boot selected, repeat Step 4 to load the Boot as acomponent for the Flash OR Glider skate models.

Your Variant Conditions should look like this.

Choose OK.

Step 6: View your results in the PSE window.

Toggle the Show/Hide Data Panel icon .

You may need to rearrange your PSE Column Optionsto look like this.

11-16 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 365: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Choose the PSE application Save icon .

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11-17

Page 366: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Setting and Saving a Variant Configuration

Variant Configurations are used to configure a particular variant of a BOM.The Variant Configuration dialog presents you with all the Options that areused in the BOM for which you can then set values, as required. You do nothave to specify values for all Options. They can remain unset, although youwould want to set them all to completely define the product variant.

A Variant Configuration is what the Marketing or Sales organization wouldtypically use to configure a particular variant of the product. Configurationsare limited to those that engineering have allowed when creating the variantdata on the BOM.

The Configure dialog shows buttons to Load and Save Variant Configurations.You can choose the Default button to set the values of options back to theirdefault values after they have been set to other values in the dialog.

11-18 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 367: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Saving Variant Configurations

You can store Variant Configurations in the Teamcenter Engineeringdatabase as objects. These can be retrieved at a later time and applied toa PSE session. This saves you from having to set all the Option valuesmanually when looking at different configurations of the product.

Choosing Save on the Configure dialog displays the Save configuration dialog.

Variant Configuration objects can be attached to appropriate Items and aresubject to release procedures and access control.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11-19

Page 368: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Activity: Setting and Saving a Variant Configuration

In this activity, you will create a Variant Configuration object for each skatemodel in the Recreational Skate Line.

Step 1: Create a Variant Configuration for the Flash model.

In the PSE application, with the 6205_###/000-Rec. SkateAssembly selected, choose the Set, save, and load variant

option values icon .

Notice that Flash is the default model for the skate assembly.

Choose the Save button in the Configuration dialog.

The Save configuration dialog appears.

11-20 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 369: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

In the Name field, enter Flash.

• Leave the Description field blank.

• From the In module as: pull-down list, select the RelationType of IMAN_Reference.

• Choose OK on the Save configuration dialog.

• Choose OK on the Configure dialog.

Step 2: View your results in My Navigator.

Return to My Navigator application.

Close the Search window and select the Home folder tab.

Expand the 6205_###/000 Item Revision.

You should see the Flash Variant Configuration object.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11-21

Page 370: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

If necessary, select the 6205_###/000 Item Revision and chooseView→Refresh.

Step 3: Create a Variant Configuration for the Glider, Streetsmart andWindrunner models.

In PSE, with the 6205_###/000-Rec. Skate Assembly selected,

choose the Set, save, and load variant option values icon .

Select Glider from the Value pull-down list.

Choose the Save button.

Enter Glider in the Name field.

Leave the Description field blank.

From the In module as: pull-down list, choose a Relation Typeof IMAN_reference.

Choose OK.

Repeat this for the Streetsmart and Windrunner models.

11-22 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 371: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Choose OK to exit the Configure dialog.

Close the PSE application.

Step 4: View your results in My Navigator.

Return to My Navigator application.

Expand the 6205_###/000 Item Revision.

Select the 6205_###/000 Item Revision and chooseView→Refresh.

You should see the four Variant Configuration objects.

Step 5: Check to see which components get loaded into the BOM for eachof the different models.

Send 6205_###/000 to the PSE and fully expand the structure.

Notice that the 3102_###/000 Boot, Right is configured and the3250_###/000 Shell, Right is not.

Notice the Y in the VOC column for the 3102_###/000 Boot,Right. This is because the model Option Value is set to Flashas the default.

To load and view the effect of a Variant Option in PSE, selectthe 6205_###/000 Rec. Skate Assembly Item and choose the

Set, save, and load variant option values icon .

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11-23

Page 372: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

This displays the Configure dialog.

Select the Windrunner model from the Value list as shown.

• Choose OK in the Configure dialog.

Notice that the 3250_###/000 Shell, Right is configuredand the 3102_###/000 Boot, Right is not.

You can choose to hide/display unconfiguredvariant parts by toggling View→ShowUnconfigured Variants.

11-24 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 373: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Close the PSE application.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11-25

Page 374: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

How does PSE work?

PSE displays the information that resides in the BOMView revision.Using PSE, you can see what the assembly structure of a productlooks like. You can navigate through the assembly to find componentsand then access any data associated with those components.

11-26 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 375: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

BOM Views and BOM View Revisions

BOM Views are used to manage product structure information for an Item.Similarly, BOM View Revisions are used to manage product structure forItem Revisions.

When you add a component to an assembly, you are creating an occurrence ofthat item or item revision in the assembly. This occurrence is displayed asa line in the BOM.

Each assembly revision has its own BOM View Revision (BVR). When yousave your PSE session, you are saving the changes to every modified BOMView Revision in that PSE window.

If you expand an item revision in My Navigator, you will see the BOMViewRevision object, which is the object in which the occurrence information isstored.

The BOMView Revision objects for the 6205_###/000 Skate Assembly areshown as the last two objects in the following diagram.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11-27

Page 376: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

PSE Multiple Views

Save As... BOMView (Revision)

You can create a new BOMView Revision by selecting an existing BomViewRevision object and choosing File→SaveAs→BOMView(Revision)...

This action results in the following:

• A BOMView Revision object is created and associated with an ItemRevision.

• The Item ID and Item Revision of the owning Item are not editable, theyare just confirmation that the correct Item Revision was selected.

• The name for the BOMView Revision is derived from the ID of the owningItem/Revision by appending the view type.

• Only one BOMView Revision of a given view type (view, assembly) canexist for an Item Revision.

11-28 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 377: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Activity: Creating Multiple BOMView Types

In this activity, you will create a new BOMView type for the Rec. SkateAssembly. In addition to the default initial view (view), you will createa second view named "assembly." The assembly view will also contain aFixture for the assembly process. The Fixture will be created as a new Itemof Type Fixture.

Step 1: In My Navigator, change your role to Tooling Engineer.

Step 2: Fully expand your 6205_### Rec. Skate Assembly Item to showthe "view" BOMView Revision.

Expand your 6205_###-Rec. Skate Assembly Item.

Expand your 6205_###-Rec. Skate Assembly Item Revision.

This displays the "view" BOMView Revision object.

Step 3: Copy (SaveAs) the "view" BOMView Revision to create an"assembly" BOMView Revision.

From My Navigator, select the 6205_###/000-view BOMViewRevision object.

Choose File→SaveAs...

This displays the SaveAs BOMView Revision dialog populatedwith values from the “view” BOMView Revision, by default.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11-29

Page 378: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Choose More... in the list of Types.

A pop-up window appears.

Select the assembly Type from the list.

Choose OK.

Select the 6205_###/000 Item Revision and chooseView→Refresh.

Notice the new “assembly” BOMView Revision object in the6205_###/000 Item Revision.

Step 4: Create a new Fixture for your 6205_###/000-assembly BOMViewRevision.

Select the Items folder and choose File→New→Item....

Select Fixture as the item type to create and choose Next.

In the ItemID field, enter 3270_###.

In the Rev field, enter 000.

In the Name field, enter Assembly Jig.

11-30 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 379: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Choose Finish.

The new Item is created in the Items folder.

Choose Close to close the New Item dialog.

Step 5: Add the Fixture to the assembly BOMView Revision.

In My Navigator, select the 3270_###/000-Assembly JigFixture Revision.

Choose Copy.

Send the 6205_###/000-assembly BomView Revision to PSE.

In PSE, select your 6205_###/000-Rec. Skate AssemblyBOMView Revision and choose the Paste icon.

Choose the PSE application Save icon.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11-31

Page 380: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Alternate Occurrences

Alternate components are parts which are interchangeable with a particularcomponent in an assembly. These are often useful in manufacturing, allowingan alternate to be used which is cheaper or quicker to purchase. Alternatesare specific to a single occurrence within an assembly.

Key Points

Following are some key points about alternate components and occurrences:

• One of the alternates is the Preferred alternate, and is always displayedin the BOM.

• The Preferred Alternate is the one used when running Unigraphics NX.

• You can change the Preferred Alternate.

• You can add any number of alternate components for a particular line inthe BOM.

• Alternates are unique to the BOM. This means that identifying a Partas an Alternate of another Part only applies in the current BOM.Occurrences of the part in other BOMs are not affected.

• To view the alternate components for a part, select the component and

choose the icon.

Adding an alternate is a modification to the BOM View Revision, and youmust therefore have write access. Changing the preferred alternate is allowedduring the session, but the change can only be saved if you have write access.

Alternate Component Display

Alternate components are identified with the symbol.

11-32 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 381: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Activity: Add Alternate Fixture to the Assembly View

In this activity, you will provide an alternate Assembly Fixture for your6205_###/000 Rec. Skate Assembly Assembly BOMView Revision. Thisis done using the PSE application.

Step 1: Provide another Assembly fixture as an Alternate.

Open the 6205_###/000-assembly BOMView Revision in PSE,if it isn’t already.

Select the 3270_###/000-Assembly Jig.

Click the List Alternate Components icon .

The List Alternates dialog appears.

Choose the Add... icon.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11-33

Page 382: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

The Add dialog appears.

In the Item ID field, typeT2105.

Press the ENTER key on the keyboard.

Choose OK.

View your results in the PSE window. Notice the3270_###/000-Assembly Jig Fixture Revision contains anAlternate display symbol.

To view the Alternates for this part, choose the List Alternates

icon .

11-34 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 383: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Close the List Alternates dialog.

Choose the PSE application Save icon.

Close the PSE application.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 11-35

Page 384: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Product Structure - Advanced

Summary

• PSE displays the information that resides in the BOMView Revision.

• BOMView Revisions are used to manage product structure for ItemRevisions.

• Variant Configurations are used to configure a particular Variant of aBOM.

• The Variant Configuration presents you with all the Options that are usedin the BOM for which you can then set values as required.

• A Variant Configuration can be set by any user to configure a particularVariant.

• Variant data is owned by a specific Revision of an Item.

• Variant Configurations are stored in the Teamcenter Engineeringdatabase as objects.

• Alternate components are parts which are interchangeable witha particular component in an assembly. These are often useful inmanufacturing, allowing an alternate to be used which is cheaper orquicker to purchase. Alternates are specific to a single occurrence withinan assembly.

• Alternate components are identified with the symbol.

11-36 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 385: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Lesson

12 Workflow -View and Initiate

Purpose

The purpose of this lesson is to describe the process of submitting data forreview using Teamcenter Engineering.

Objective

Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

• Submit Data for Review

• Work with the Inbox

• Identify States of Life-cycle

• Recognize that you have a Task to Perform

• Explain the difference between Target and Reference objects

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 12-1

Page 386: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

Overview of Workflow

Workflow stems from the concept that all work flows through one or moreprocesses in order to accomplish an objective. Workflow is the automation ofthose business processes. Using Workflow, documents, information, and tasksare passed between participants during the completion of a particular process.

Your Site Administrator will use Process Designer to model workflowprocesses, allocate resources, and manage data according to business rules.Users will utilize the Inbox to accomplish workflow tasks.

Teamcenter Engineering provides three applications used to accomplishWorkflow objectives:

• Process Designer is a graphical Process Designer application. SystemAdministrators use Process Designer to graphically create processtemplates which end users can then use to initiate Workflow processes.

• Inbox allows you to perform and track tasks that have been eitherassigned to you or were created by you. Inbox provides you with a listof all the tasks that you are responsible for, and allows you to completethose tasks.

• Process Viewer allows end users to view the progress of a Workflowprocess, even if they are not a participating member of that particularprocess.

A Process uses defined tasks to automatically notify selected users requestingwork signoff. The requests are tracked through an electronic Inbox and eachrequest maintains pointers to the data being approved.

A Process can have any number of tasks arranged in a serial or parallelprogression. At the time of signoff, each Review Task has a list of usersallocated to perform the signoff.

12-2 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 387: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

States of Release

A Status Type (Release Status) can be set on almost any data upon completionof a Process. The "Release Status" property of the object informs you aboutthe function or purpose of the data. An object’s Release Status propertiesinclude the Release Status Name and the Release Status Date.

An example of Release Status is shown in the following diagram.

Data in the system can be in one of three states:

• Statused - Data stored with Item Revisions that have obtainedthis status are considered "Production" data. The data is generally ina "write-protected" mode meaning it cannot be changed unless a newrevision letter is created.

• In-Process - The object is currently in a workflow process.

• (Empty Value) - If the Item Revision has no value for status, it is said tobe "Working" data. That means someone is currently working on the datacontained in the Item Revision.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 12-3

Page 388: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

Initiating a Process

To start a process on data, select the Revision object and chooseFile→New→Process. The New Process dialog is displayed. Notice that theselected object is placed on the list as a Target.

Key Points

Following are key points about the New Process dialog:

• Process Name may be changed but is populated with a name based onthe object you selected. The Process name should be short and descriptive.

• Description field can be used to describe the process (optional).

• Select the desired Process Template from the drop-down menu.

12-4 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 389: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

How do I know I have a Task to Perform?

When you receive a new task that requires your attention, the Inbox iconappears in the lower right corner of the display stating the message, Newtask found.

To launch the Inbox window, double-click the Inbox icon.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 12-5

Page 390: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

Working with the Inbox

The Inbox is used to perform electronic workflow processes.

Key Points

Following are key points about working in the Inbox.

• The Inbox is used to access tasks, notify you of new tasks and provideaccess to the Process window.

• You will use the Inbox for the review and approval of data in the Tasks toPerform folder

• The only tasks you will see in your Inbox are those tasks that you mustperform or those tasks for which you are the person responsible.

• You may use Inbox to identify users to review the data.

• The Tasks to Track folder contains tasks you assigned to other usersfor processes you have initiated.

12-6 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 391: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

Selecting the Sign-off Team

When you initiate a Review process, the first thing you must do is assignspecific users to perform the sign-offs for each review task defined in theprocess. You can do this using any of the following methods:

• Task View

• Process View

• Perform icon

Task View

From the Inbox, click on the desired task with the Task View option selectedon the Viewer tab. This displays the Task View.

The Task View gives you a focused view of the selected task.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 12-7

Page 392: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

Process View

From the Inbox, click on the desired task with the Process View optionselected on the Viewer tab.

This gives you a graphical display of the overall process as it moves throughthe different states of release.

12-8 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 393: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

Perform icon

Another way to perform a task is to highlight the desired task and choose

the Perform icon .

Selecting the select-signoff-team task and choosing Perform brings up theSelect Signoff dialog.

To assign a signoff team member, highlight the Role, select the user toperform the signoff, and choose the + sign.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 12-9

Page 394: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

Check-In

You cannot initiate process on data that is checked out. To remove thechecked out status of data when you are finished working on it, you can useeither the Check-In or Cancel Check-Out options.

Performing a Check-In

You can use the Tools→Check In/Out→Check-In action to unlock the datathat is checked out.

Cancel Check-Out

You can use the Tools→Check In/Out→Cancel Check-Out option to unlock achecked-out object and return the dataset to the original condition it existedin before it was checked out.

12-10 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 395: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

Activity: Initiating the Workflow Process

In this activity, you will initiate the Workflow process. First, you will verifythat the Part is checked in.

Step 1: Logon to Teamcenter Engineering as the Design Engineer,de### (where ### is a number designated by your instructor).

If you are currently logged into Portal, exit the Portalapplication and log back in as de###.

Step 2: Verify that your role is set to Design Engineer.

Step 3: Expand your Newstuff folder to locate the part for release.

Step 4: Expand the Item to show the 1250-###/000-Axle Item Revision.

Step 5: Verify that the data being released is checked in.

Expand the 1250-###/000-Axle Item Revision.

Select the Item Revision and review the CO (Checked Out)column in the Properties table. You may need to scroll to theright to view the CO column.

If the data is Checked out, you will see a Y in the CO column.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 12-11

Page 396: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

Step 6: Initiate your 1250-###/000-Axle Item Revision for release.

Select the 1250-###/000-Axle Item Revision and chooseFile→New→Process....

The value in the Process Name field defaults to the name ofthe object you selected for release.

Notice the 1250-###/000-Axle Item Revision has automaticallybeen pasted into the Process Name field with a relation ofTarget shown in the Attachments tab.

Enter a description in the Description field, if desired (thisfield is optional).

Set the value of the Process Template field to ProductionRelease.

Choose OK on the New Process dialog to initiate the objectfor release.

If necessary, choose OK on the Warning dialog.

Because you are the initiator of the Process,the next task will be sent to your Inbox.

This concludes the activity.

12-12 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 397: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

Activity: Submitting Data for Review

In this activity, you will continue in the role of Design Engineer to submitdata for review.

Step 1: You should be logged on to Teamcenter Engineering as the DesignEngineer, de###.

Step 2: Click the Open Inbox icon .

The Inbox contains the Tasks to Perform and Tasks to Trackfolders.

Step 3: Locate and view the Design Engineer’s task.

Expand the Tasks to Perform folder.

You have a task to perform.

Expand the Originator Prepare for Review task object.

Expand the Targets folder.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 12-13

Page 398: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

The data listed in the Targets folder is the data that will besubmitted for review. At the end of a successful review process,this data will be "Released."

Expand the References folder.

The References folder is empty.

Select the Originator Prepare for Review task object.

Choose the Viewer tab.

Your next task is to initiate the requests for review. You willselect the signoff team for all levels of the Process.

Select the Process View toggle to view the process flow.

12-14 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 399: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

The Process View shows you all levels of the process.

Expand the Product Engineer Review, Engineering AnalystReview, and Manufacturing Engineer Review levels in theProcess window.

Step 4: Select the Signoff Team for the Product Engineer Review.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 12-15

Page 400: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

Select the select-signoff-team task in the Product Engineer

Review task and choose the Perform icon on the mainMy Navigator Tool bar.

The Select Signoff Team dialog appears.

Select */Product Engineer/1 in the Profiles list on the leftside of the dialog.

Select your User ID ( pe###) from the User drop-down listand click the + sign.

12-16 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 401: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

Choose Close.

You have just selected the signoff team for the first level of theprocess, the Product Engineer Review level.

Step 5: Select the Signoff Team for the Engineering Analyst Review.

Select the select-signoff-team task in the Engineering Analyst

Review task and choose the Perform icon .

The Select Signoff Team dialog appears.

Select */Engineering Analyst/1 in the Profiles list on the leftside of the dialog.

Select the User ID for the reviewer from the User drop-downlist ( ea###).

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 12-17

Page 402: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

Click the + sign to assign the selected user.

Choose Close.

Step 6: Select the Signoff Team for the Manufacturing Engineer Review.Assign the Manufacturing Engineer Review task to a ResourcePool for the Manufacturing Engineer Role.

Select the select-signoff-team task in the Manufacturing

Engineer Review task and choose the Perform icon .

The Select Signoff Team dialog appears.

12-18 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 403: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

Select */Manufacturing Engineer/1 from the Profiles list onthe left.

In the next action, select the * from the Userdrop-down list. This assigns the task to a ResourcePool, which means that any user with the Role ofManufacturing Engineer can perform this signoff.This will be discussed in more detail later on.

Scroll down to the bottom of the User list, select * and thenclick the + sign.

Choose Close.

You have completed the selection of signoff teams for all levelsof the Production Release process.

Step 7: Indicate that you have completed the selection of the signoff teams(Originator Prepare for Review).

Select the Task View toggle on the Viewer tab.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 12-19

Page 404: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

Check the Done box at the bottom of the Task View displayand choose Apply.

Notice the Originator Prepare for Review task object is removedfrom your Tasks to Perform folder and a perform-signoffs taskappears in your Tasks to Track folder.

Expand the Tasks to Track folder.

The initiator uses the display of the perform-signoffs task totrack the progress of the process throughout all subsequentdownstream tasks.

Step 8: View the current state of the process.

In the Tasks to Track folder, select the perform-signoffstask object.

With the Viewer tab selected, choose the Task View toggle.

12-20 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 405: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

Using Task View, you can see that the Product Engineer (pe###) is currently assigned to review the task. The currentdisposition of the task is No Decision.

Select the Process View toggle on the Viewer tab.

Select the top entry of the Task Tree (Production Release).

Selecting the top node of the Task Tree allows youto see the “big picture” of the process flow in theProcess View display.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 12-21

Page 406: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

You can widen the Process window to see the fullname of each review task.

Observe in the diagram that the Originator Prepare for Reviewtask is complete (flag icon) and the Product Engineer Reviewtask is currently active (traffic light icon). The EngineeringAnalyst Review and Manufacturing Engineer Review taskshave not yet begun (Pending Tasks).

Step 9: Exit the Portal application.

Choose File→Exit.

Choose Yes to exit Portal.

You have completed your work as the DesignEngineer. Next you will assume the role of ProductEngineer and perform the corresponding tasks.

This concludes the activity.

12-22 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 407: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Workflow -View and Initiate

Summary

The Inbox is used to access tasks, notify you of new tasks and provide accessto the Process window.

The only workflow objects that you will see in your Inbox are those tasks thatyou must perform or those tasks for which you are the person responsible.

Data in the system can be in one of the following Life-cycle states:

• Released - Data stored with Item Revisions that have obtained thisstatus are considered "Production" data. The data is in a "write-protected"mode meaning it cannot be changed unless a new revision letter is created.

• In-Process - The object is currently in a workflow process.

• (Empty Value) - If the Item Revision has no value for status, it is said tobe "Working" data. That means someone is currently working on the datacontained in the Item Revision.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 12-23

Page 408: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9
Page 409: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Lesson

13 Reviewing and DispositioningData

Purpose

The purpose of this lesson is to describe the process of reviewing data usingTeamcenter Engineering.

Objective

Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

• Use Inbox Task and Process View

• Perform a Review Task

• Use Process Viewer to monitor a process

• View the Audit File

• Use Resource Pools

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 13-1

Page 410: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Task View

The Task View toggle in the Viewer tab gives you a focused view of theselected task. The Task View window shows key information about the taskin the form of links that provide access to dialog windows where you canview or modify the task information.

13-2 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 411: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

You can use the Task View window to:

• View or reassign the Responsible Party. This defaults to the TaskOriginator.

• View the task Instructions for the assigned user to perform to completethe task.

• View the Attachments list to see the Target and Reference objects forthe task.

• View the User-Group/Role assigned to complete the task and, ifappropriate, delegate the task to another User-Group/Role.

• View or modify the sign-off Decision.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 13-3

Page 412: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Attachments

Choose the Attachments link to view the Target and Reference objects forthe selected task.

An attachment is an object associated with a Process. There are two kindsof attachments:

• Target objects - any objects that will be released via a process. Targetobjects are assigned a release status when the process completes.

• Reference objects - objects required to provide information to personsperforming tasks. Reference objects do not get a status change when theprocess completes.

Choose the Attachments link to see the Target and Reference objects forthe selected task.

Decision

Choose the Decision link to access the Signoff Decision dialog for the task.

Use the Signoff Decision dialog to select the appropriate decision for yourtask, enter any comments, and choose the OK button to confirm your decision.

13-4 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 413: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Process View

The Process View toggle in the Viewer tab gives you a graphical display ofthe overall process as it moves through the different stages of release.

• A Do Task has a dialog which allows the user to set a check-box toindicate when the task is complete.

• A Review Task is a task template which includes select-signoff-team andperform-signoffs sub-tasks. Each of these sub-tasks contain their owndialog for executing the respective processes.

In the example diagram above, the Originator Prepare for Review task is aDo Task and Project Engineer Review is a Review task.

The green arrow denotes the active task in the process.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 13-5

Page 414: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Performing a Review Task

Once the Designer submits data for review, the perform-signoffs task getsdistributed to the appropriate users’ Inbox. Those users will receive aperform-signoffs task in their Inbox in the Tasks to Perform folder.

Open the Inbox and expand the Tasks to Perform folder. Highlight theperform-signoffs task.

Make sure your Group and Role settings are correct before youperform a signoff.

13-6 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 415: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Approving or Rejecting a Signoff Task

Use the Signoff Decision dialog to Approve or Reject a Signoff Task.

Approving a Signoff

Selecting Approve performs a signoff on the task.

• If you are the only Approver, or last required Approver, the process movesto the next step(s).

• If you are one of multiple Approvers, and other Approvers have notapproved yet, the perform-signoffs task moves to your Tasks to Trackfolder.

Rejecting a Signoff

Selecting Reject rejects the signoff of the task. This means that your decisionwill not count toward the approval/signoff of the task. If the quorum requiresall signoffs to approve, Reject stops the process.

Depending on how the process is designed, selecting ’Reject’ will do one ofthe following:

• Remove the perform-signoff task from your Inbox and return the Processto a prior task.

• Move your perform-signoff task to your ’Tasks to Track’ folder but keepthe current review task the active process task.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 13-7

Page 416: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Activity: Product Engineer Review

In this activity, you will assume the role of the Product Engineer and reviewdata submitted to you by the Design Engineer.

Step 1: Logon to Teamcenter Engineering as the Product Engineer,pe### (where ### is a number designated by your instructor).

If you are currently logged into Portal, exit and log backin as pe###.

Step 2: Verify that your Role is set to Product Engineer.

Step 3: Open the Inbox.

Step 4: Locate and view the Product Engineer’s task.

Expand the Tasks to Perform folder.

You will see a perform-signoffs task in your folder.

Expand the perform-signoffs task object.

Expand Targets.

This is the data you are being asked to review. Before yousignoff, be sure to review the data.

13-8 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 417: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Step 5: Review the data associated with the perform-signoff task.

Select the DWG1250-000_- dataset in the Targets list in theInbox object tree.

Choose the Start/Open in UG icon .

View the drawing.

Exit Unigraphics NX by choosing File→Exit.

Step 6: Execute your disposition for the data.

Select the perform-signoffs task object.

The Task View is displayed by default in the Viewer tab.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 13-9

Page 418: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Toggle to the Process View to see where the process will goafter you approve the data.

Select the top node of the Task Tree, Production Release, inthe Process View window. This shows the entire process flow.

13-10 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 419: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Following the review by the Product Engineer, parallel reviewsby a Stress Engineer (Engineering Analyst Review) andManufacturing Engineer will begin.

Toggle back to the Task View.

Choose the No Decision link in the Decision column.

The Signoff Decision dialog displays.

Choose the Approve toggle.

Enter a comment in the Comment field.

Choose the OK button.

Observe that the perform-signoff task is removed from yourTasks to Perform folder.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 13-11

Page 420: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

There are no objects in your Tasks to Track folder.

The Design Engineer/Initiator now has two perform-signoffstask objects in their Tasks to Track folder; the tasks assignedto the Stress Engineer (Engineering Analyst Review) andManufacturing Engineer.

In the next section, you will see how to capture aprocess object so that you can continue to monitor theprocess after it leaves your Inbox.

Step 7: Exit Portal.

This concludes the activity.

13-12 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 421: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

How do you Follow a Process after it leaves your Inbox?

To monitor a process after it leaves your Inbox, do the following:

• Before you execute a task, copy the In-Process Item Revision from thetask’s Targets list and paste into your Home folder in My Navigator.

• Send the Item Revision to the Process Viewer application.

• View the Audit File.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 13-13

Page 422: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Process Viewer Application

The Process Viewer application is used to interact with jobs that arecurrently in a Workflow process (even if you are not a participating memberof the process). The Process Viewer application has all of the features of theViewer tab in My Navigator plus some added capability.

To launch Process Viewer, select any data identified as In-Process by the

In-Process symbol , and use the shortcut Menu Send To→Process Viewercommand.

Process Viewer allows you to view the following elements of a Workflowprocess:

• Task Flow

• Task Status

• Task Attachments

• Participants

• Participants dispositions

13-14 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 423: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Viewing the Audit File

The Audit File is a record of all user involvement during the workflow process.

To view an Audit File, select the task and choose View→Audit.... Following isan example of an Audit File:

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 13-15

Page 424: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Activity: Engineering Analyst Review

In this activity, you will assume the role of the Stress Engineer and reviewand approve the data. You will also use Copy Process to copy a process objectto My Navigator application.

Step 1: Logon to Teamcenter Engineering as the Engineering Analyst,ea### (where ### is a number designated by your instructor).

Step 2: Verify that your role is set to Engineering Analyst.

Step 3: Create a new Folder in your Home Folder called Objects IApproved.

Step 4: Open the Inbox.

Step 5: Locate your perform-signoffs task.

13-16 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 425: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Step 6: Open the attached drawing.

Expand the perform-signoffs task.

Expand Targets.

Verify the Viewer tab is selected.

Select the 1250-### DWG Image dataset in the Targets list.

The drawing displays in the Viewer window.

View the drawing.

Step 7: Copy the Target Item Revision to Home.

In this step, you will copy the Target Item Revision and paste itinto your Objects I Approved folder. This allows you to follow thedata through the rest of the process even though you may nolonger have an associated task in your Inbox.

Copy the 1250-###/000-Axle Item Revision from the Targetslist and paste into your Objects I Approved folder.

Step 8: Send the Item Revision to the Process Viewer application.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 13-17

Page 426: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Right-click on the 1250-###/000-Axle Item Revision object andchoose Send To→Process Viewer.

The Process Viewer application is launched.

Double-click the Engineering Analyst Review task box.

The process flow diagram changes to show the process tasksfor the Engineering Analyst Review task.

13-18 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 427: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Step 9: Using Process Viewer, answer the following questions:

This information is available in the Audit File. Toview the Audit File, select the task (Product EngineerReview), right-click and choose View→Audit....

Who approved the data as Product Engineer?_________________________________________

When did the Product Engineer approval take place?_________________________________________

Were any comments entered?_________________________________________

Choose File→Close to close the Process Viewer.

Step 10: Approve the data (from the Inbox).

In the Inbox, select the perform-signoffs task.

Toggle to the Task View.

Choose the No Decision link in the Decision column.

The Signoff Decision dialog displays.

Choose the Approve toggle.

Enter a comment in the Comment field.

Choose the OK button.

The perform-signoffs task is removed from your Tasks to Performfolder.

Step 11: View the Audit File for the Product Engineer Review task.

Choose your Home tab.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 13-19

Page 428: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Open your Objects I Approve folder.

Open the Audit File.

Notice that the approval you just completed as the EngineeringAnalyst is captured in the file.

Close the View Audit File window.

Step 12: Exit the Portal application.

This concludes the activity.

13-20 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 429: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Using Resource Pools

A Resource Pool is a Group, Role, or Role in a Group, which can be assignedtasks the same way an individual User is assigned tasks.

From the Inbox, choose Tools→Resource Pool Subscription to open theResource Pool Subscription dialog.

For example, you can choose the Role of Manufacturing Engineer and choosethe + sign to set up a resource pool Inbox for that specific role.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 13-21

Page 430: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Delegating Tasks

You can delegate tasks from a Resource Pool to your personal Inbox andvice versa.

A single task in the */Manufacturing Engineer Inbox (Resource Pool) canbe viewed and performed by multiple users who have subscribed to thatInbox. Delegating the task to your specific user Inbox will avoid duplicationof effort and should be done when it will take an extended period of timeto perform the task.

From Resource Pool to Personal Inbox

Use the following procedure to delegate a sign-off task from a Resource Poolto your Personal Inbox:

• Expand the Inbox for the assigned Resource Pool.

• Expand the Tasks to Perform folder in the assigned Resource Pool’s Inbox.

• Select the perform-signoffs task.

• Toggle on Task View in the Viewer tab.

• Choose the link to the assigned Resource Pool in the User-Group/Rolecolumn of the Task View window.

The Delegate Signoff dialog appears.

• Select your User ID from the User drop-down list.

13-22 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 431: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

• Choose OK.

The task is removed from the Resource Pool’s Inbox and placed in your Tasksto Perform folder. The responsibility of this task has been transferred tothe delegated User.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 13-23

Page 432: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Out of Office Assistant

You can use the Out of Office Assistant to forward your tasks to anotherUser’s Inbox while you are out of the office.

To set this up, open your Inbox and choose Tools→Out of Office Assistant....

Key Points

Following are some key points about the Out of Office Assistant.

• Use the Out of Office Assistant dialog to set the period of time you willbe out of the office, and the User ID of the recipient who should receiveyour tasks during your absence.

• Inbox will redirect tasks assigned to you during your absence to theselected User. It is also possible to redirect your tasks to a ResourcePool instead of an individual User.

• System Administrators can modify any User’s Out of Office settings.

13-24 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 433: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Automated Tasks

Some process tasks should be considered automated tasks. They are notperformed by users. They may be used to automatically process targetdata. The process for an automated task consist of only two phases, Startand Finish.

For example, the DWG Image Update / Data Release task is an automatedtask in the Production Release process.

Once the reviews are complete and approved, the drawing image update datais automatically released, going from the Start phase directly to the Finishphase.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 13-25

Page 434: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Activity: Manufacturing Engineering Review

In this activity, you will assume the role of the Manufacturing Engineer. Aspecific user for this review was not selected by the initiator in order todemonstrate the use of Resource Pools for review tasks.

Step 1: Logon to Teamcenter Engineering as me### (where ### is anumber designated by your instructor).

Step 2: Verify that your Role is set to Manufacturing Engineer.

Step 3: Open the Inbox.

Step 4: Expand the Tasks to Perform folder.

There are no tasks in your User Inbox because the task wasassigned to the Manufacturing Engineering resource pool.

Step 5: Add the Manufacturing Engineer resource pool Inbox to yourdisplay.

Choose Tools→Resource Pool Subscription....

Set Group to hockey.

Set the Role to Manufacturing Engineer.

Choose the + sign.

13-26 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 435: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Choose the Cancel button.

Step 6: Look for the task in the added Inbox.

Expand the hockey/Manufacturing Engineer Inbox.

Expand the Tasks to Perform folder in thehockey/Manufacturing Engineer Inbox.

Step 7: Look at the process in the Process View window.

Select the perform-signoffs (1250-###/000-Axle) task.

Toggle on Process View in the Viewer tab.

Step 8: Delegate the task to yourself (logged in as me###).

Toggle on Task View in the Viewer tab.

Choose the *-hockey/Manufacturing Engineer link in theUser-Group/Role column of the Task View window.

The Delegate Signoff dialog appears.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 13-27

Page 436: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Select your me### User ID from the User drop-down list.

Choose OK.

The task is removed from the hockey/Manufacturing EngineerInbox and placed in your Tasks to Perform folder. Theresponsibility of this task has been transferred to you.

Step 9: Approve the data.

Select your perform-signoffs task.

Choose the No Decision link in the Decision column.

13-28 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 437: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Choose Approve as the Decision.

Enter any comments and choose OK.

The task is removed from your Inbox.

Step 10: Search for the Item and observe the Release status obtained.

Return to your Home folder.

Search for the 1250-###-Axle Item and view the value of theRelease Status property.

Step 11: Exit Teamcenter Engineering.

Choose File→Exit.

Choose Yes to exit Portal.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 13-29

Page 438: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reviewing and Dispositioning Data

Summary

• Target objects are any objects that will be released via a process. Targetobjects are assigned a Release Status when the process completes.

• Reference objects are objects required to provide information to personsperforming the tasks. Reference objects do not get a status change whenthe process completes.

• The Task View provides a focused view of the selected task. The TaskView window shows key information about the task in the form of linksthat provide access to dialog windows where you can view or modifythe task information.

• The Process View provides a graphical display of the overall process asit moves through the different stages of release.

• A Resource Pool is a Group, Role, or a Role in a Group which can beassigned tasks the same way an individual User is assigned tasks. AResource Pool can be listed as the Responsible Party of a task, or as amember of the Signoff Team.

• From your Inbox, you can use Tools→Out of Office Assistant to forwardyour tasks to another User’s Inbox while you are out of the office.

13-30 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 439: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Lesson

14 Visualization Data MarkupUsing Portal Visualization

Purpose

The purpose of this lesson is to demonstrate how to use the PortalVisualization application to create markup information from 2D and 3Dvisualization data.

Objectives

Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

• Locate and View 2D and 3D Visualization Data using Portal Visualization

• Use Portal Visualization to Create Markup Information using 3DVisualization Data

• Use Portal Visualization to Create Markup Information using 2DVisualization Data

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 14-1

Page 440: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

Where is the Visualization Data?

2D and 3D visualization data exists as dataset objects within an ItemRevision.

There is no limitation of dataset types that may contain visualization data.Some of the more common dataset types that you would expect to providevisualization data include:

Common 3D visualization dataset types:

• DirectModel

Common 2D visualization dataset types:

• UGMASTER

• UGPART

• DrawingSheet

• Image

14-2 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 441: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

Viewing 2D data

To view the data using Portal Visualization, simply select the dataset in theobject tree with the Viewer tab active. Portal Visualization renders the datain the appropriate mode (2D or 3D) based on the format of the file associatedwith the dataset.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 14-3

Page 442: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

Viewing 3D data

To view 3D data using Portal Visualization, select the DirectModel datasetin the object tree with the Viewer tab active. Portal Visualization displaysthe 3D image.

14-4 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 443: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

Activity: Locate and View Visualization Data

In this activity, you will find an Item and view the associated 2D and 3Dvisualization data using the Portal Visualization application.

Step 1: Logon to My Navigator as pe### (where ### is a numberdesignated by your instructor).

Step 2: Find the 1250-### Item (where ### is a number designated byyour instructor).

After finding the Item, close the Search panel andconduct the rest of the activities of this lesson using thesearch results tab.

Step 3: View the 2D visualization data.

Fully expand the Item and Item Revision object.

Select the Image dataset object in the object tree.

Choose the Viewer tab.

After a moment, a CGM (2D) file of the part drawing displaysin the Portal Visualization.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 14-5

Page 444: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

Practice using the View All, Zoom Window, Seek, Pan, andZoom features of Portal Visualization in 2D mode.

Step 4: View the 3D visualization data.

Select the DirectModel dataset object in the object tree.

After a moment, a JT (3D) file of the part model displays in thePortal Visualization.

Practice using the View All, Zoom Window, Seek, Rotate, Pan,and Zoom features of Portal Visualization in 3D mode.

This concludes the activity.

14-6 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 445: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

Creating Markup Data from 3D Visualization Data

3D visualization data is most often associated with the DirectModel datasettype.

Creating markup data from 3D visualization data is a two-step process:

1. Capture a 2D Image dataset of the 3D visualization data associatedwith the DirectModel dataset.

2. Create Markup Layers using the 2D Image dataset.

Markup data is stored as a DirectModelMarkup dataset that is associatedwith the Image dataset used to create the Markup Layers for the 3Dvisualization data.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 14-7

Page 446: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

Steps to Create DirectModelMarkup Data

1. View the 3D data source.

2. Position the image in the desired orientation and add any desiredinformation such as feature measurements, clearance dimensions, etc.

3. Perform an Image Capture of the configured view. This invokesthe Image Capture dialog.

4. Provide a name for the Image dataset and choose the desired format forthe Image file. This file is a 2D "snapshot" of the base 3D data.

5. Choosing OK on this dialog creates a new 2D Image dataset for theselected 3D DirectModel dataset.

6. Select the Image dataset in the object tree. The captured image displaysin the viewer.

7. Perform a Create Markup on the captured Image dataset. Thisinvokes the Create Markup Layer dialog.

8. Provide a name for the Markup Layer and choose the desired format.

14-8 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 447: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

9. Choosing OK on the dialog creates a new dataset ( DirectModelMarkup)for the markup layer.

10. Select the DirectModelMarkup dataset. The markup layer displays inthe viewer.

With the DirectModelMarkup selected, the Markup 2D toolbarautomatically displays in the viewer.

11. Activate the Markup 2D toolbar by choosing the Enable Markup icon.

12. Annotate the image as required using functions from the Markup 2Dtoolbar.

13. Save the annotations .

14. Name the layer that stores the annotation information.

15. Notice that the annotation is listed as a layer in the layer list and is aCGM formatted file.

16. Right–click to manage existing annotation layers or add more annotationlayers

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 14-9

Page 448: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

17. Remember to Save any new annotation layers or modified annotationlayers. The asterisk symbol indicates that Save is required.

18. The display of annotation layers can be turned on or off by clicking thecircle symbols next to the annotation layer name.

• Green Circle – Layer displayed and current working layer.

• Black Circle – Layer displayed.

• White Circle – Layer not displayed.

14-10 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 449: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

Activity: Creating a Markup From a 3D Image

In this activity, you will create markup data using existing 3D visualizationdata.

Step 1: View the 3D visualization data of the 1250-###-Axle.

You were doing this at the conclusion of the previousactivity.

Step 2: Prepare the orientation of the view.

Orient the view to the position you want to captureas a 2D "snapshot."

Step 3: Capture the view as an Image dataset.

Choose the Image Capture icon from the PortalVisualization toolbar.

The Capturing Image dialog appears.

Provide the following parameters for the dialog.

Dataset Name: capture1

Image Format: JPEG 24 bit

Description: <optional>

Choose OK.

Step 4: Locate and view the Image dataset.

Expand the DirectModel dataset in the object tree.

Select the Image dataset you just created, capture1.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 14-11

Page 450: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

The 2D image associated with the Image dataset displays inthe Portal Visualization viewer.

Step 5: Create a new markup layer for annotation.

Choose the Create Markup icon from the PortalVisualization toolbar.

The Create Markup Layer dialog displays.

Provide the following parameters for the dialog.

Dataset Name: markup1

Image Format: JPEG 24 bit

Description: <optional>

Choose OK.

14-12 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 451: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

A new DirectModelMarkup dataset is created for the markuplayer.

Step 6: Annotate the markup layer.

Select the DirectModelMarkup dataset, markup1.

The markup layer displays in the viewer.

With the DirectModelMarkup selected, the Markup 2D toolbarautomatically displays in the viewer.

Activate the Markup 2D toolbar by choosing the Enable

Markup icon.

Choose the Unrestricted Text icon from the Markup 2Dtoolbar.

Notice the addition of a new layer in the Markup Layers listing.

Point to a location within the graphics area and single-clickon it.

The Text Editor dialog appears.

Type some text in the Text Editor dialog and choose OK.

Observe the placement of your annotation in the graphics area.Also observe the addition of the asterisk symbol (*) next to thename of the new markup layer. This symbol indicates thatyou need to save the layer.

Step 7: Save the creation of the new markup layer.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 14-13

Page 452: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

Choose the Save Layers icon from the toolbar at the top ofthe Portal Visualization graphics window.

The Save Layer dialog displays.

Choose OK on the Save Layer 1 dialog.

The markup layer file is saved in CGM format and displaysin the Markup Layers list.

You have just created markup data by using the existing 3Ddata associated with the DirectModel dataset.

This concludes the activity.

14-14 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 453: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

Creating Markup Data from 2D Visualization Data

2D visualization data can be associated with various dataset types, including:

• UGMASTER

• UGPART

• DrawingSheet

• Image

However, 2D markup datasets can only be created and associated to thefollowing dataset types:

• DrawingSheet

• Image

Markup data created from the 2D data is stored as a Markup datasetassociated with either an Image or DrawingSheet dataset.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 14-15

Page 454: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

Steps to Create 2D Markup Data

1. View the 2D data source ( Image or DrawingSheet dataset).

2. Choose the Open File icon from the Portal Visualization toolbar.This invokes the Create Markup Layer dialog.

3. Provide a name for the markup dataset and choose the desired format forthe markup file. This file is a "copy" of the original 2D data.

4. Choose OK on the dialog to create a new dataset ( Markup) for theselected 2D source dataset (Image or DrawingSheet).

5. Select the Markup dataset in the object tree.

The copied image file displays in the viewer.

With the Markup dataset selected, the Markup 2D toolbar automaticallydisplays in the viewer.

6. Activate the Markup 2D toolbar by choosing the Enable Markup icon,

, located on the Markup 2D toolbar.

7. Annotate the image, as needed, using functions from the Markup 2Dtoolbar.

8. Save the annotations .

9. Name the layer that stores the annotation information.

14-16 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 455: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

10. Notice that the annotation is listed as a layer in the layer list and is aCGM formatted file.

11. Right-click a layer in the layer list to manage existing annotation layersor add more annotation layers.

12. Remember to Save any new annotation layers or modified annotationlayers. The asterisk symbol indicates that Save is required.

13. The display of annotation layers can be turned on or off by clicking thecircle symbols next to the annotation layer name.

• Green Circle – Layer displayed and current working layer.

• Black Circle – Layer displayed.

• White Circle – Layer not displayed.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 14-17

Page 456: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

Activity: Creating a Markup From a 2D Image

In this activity, you will create markup data using existing 2D visualizationdata.

Step 1: View the 2D visualization data.

Select the Image dataset object in the object tree.

Choose the Viewer tab.

After a moment, a CGM (2D) file of the part drawing displaysin the Portal Visualization viewer.

Step 2: Create a Markup dataset.

Choose the Create Markup icon from the PortalVisualization toolbar.

The Create Markup Layer dialog appears.

14-18 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 457: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

Provide the following parameters for the dialog.

Dataset Name: markup1

Image Format: JPEG 24 bit

Description: <optional>

Choose OK.

Step 3: Locate and view the Markup dataset.

Expand the Image dataset in the object tree.

Select the Markup dataset, markup1.

The 2D image associated with the Markup dataset displays inthe Portal Visualization viewer.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 14-19

Page 458: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

With the Markup dataset selected, the Markup 2Dtoolbar automatically displays in the viewer window.

Step 4: Create annotations for the markup layer.

Activate the Markup 2D toolbar by choosing the Enable

Markup icon .

Choose the Unrestricted Text icon from the Markup 2Dtoolbar.

Notice the addition of a new layer in the Markup Layers listing.

Point to a location within the graphics area and Single-click.

The Text Editor dialog displays.

14-20 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 459: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

Type some text in the Text Editor dialog and choose OK.

Observe the placement of your annotation in the graphics area.Also observe the addition of the asterisk symbol (*) next to thename of the new markup layer. This symbol indicates thatyou need to save the layer.

Step 5: Save the creation of the new markup layer.

Choose the Save Layers icon from the Portal Visualizationtoolbar in the viewer.

Choose OK on the Save Layer 1 dialog.

You have just created markup data by using the existing 2D dataassociated with the Image dataset.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 14-21

Page 460: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

Procedural Considerations

When Can Markup Data Be Created?

Markup data can be created for 2D and 3D visualization datasets at any timeduring the data life-cycle. Recall that data in Teamcenter Engineering isin one of the three following states:

• Statused - The visualization dataset is in a "write-protected"mode meaning it cannot be changed unless a new revision of the Itemcreated. However it is possible to create a markup dataset for a statusedvisualization dataset. A business may do this to "propose" change tostatused data.

• In-Process - The object is currently in a workflow process.

• (Empty Value) - If the dataset has no value for status, it is said to be"Working" data. That means someone is currently working on the data.

14-22 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 461: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

Who Can Create a New Markup Dataset?

Generally, there are no restrictions in place to limit who can create amarkup dataset for a visualization dataset. It is possible to have numerousindependent markup datasets for a single visualization dataset, each havingbeen created by a different user.

Who Can Define Layers Within a Markup Dataset?

Generally, there are restrictions in place to limit who can add annotationlayers to a single markup dataset. Some examples of who would be permittedto create annotation layers within a markup dataset include:

• Only the creator of the markup dataset.

• All members of the same group as the markup dataset creator.

• Only defined role(s) within the group that owns the markup dataset.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 14-23

Page 462: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Visualization Data Markup Using Portal Visualization

Summary

2D and 3D visualization data will exist as dataset objects within an ItemRevision.

• To view the data using Portal Visualization, simply select the dataset inthe object tree with the Viewer tab active.

• Markup datasets can only be created and associated to the followingdataset types:

DirectModel

DrawingSheet

Image

• While viewing 3D data, use the Image Capture icon from the PortalVisualization toolbar to begin the markup procedure.

• While viewing 2D data, use the Create Markup icon from the PortalVisualization toolbar to begin the markup procedure.

• Markup data created from the 2D data is stored as a Markup dataset thatis associated with either an Image dataset or a DrawingSheet dataset.

14-24 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 463: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Lesson

15 Change Management - View

Purpose

The purpose of this lesson is to demonstrate how to find and view existingChange objects using the CM Viewer application.

Objectives

Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

• Find existing Change objects

• Interrogate existing Change objects using the CM Viewer application

• View Supercedure data for existing Change objects

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 15-1

Page 464: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

What is Change Management?

Change Management (CM) is the formal process of proposing, controlling,and approving changes to a product’s definition and configuration.

The CM application collects all the information relative to why a partchanged, including who was involved in the change process.

Benefits of the CM Application

The CM Application is used to provide the following benefits:

• Collect all data related to the change

• Propose Solutions, manage Problem Items and track Affected Items

• Provide an audit trail history of the objects used in a process

• Track the process that the Change object is going through

• Track BOM changes (Adds and Cancels)

15-2 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 465: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

What is a Change Object?

A Change object is used to control all changes to a product’s definition andconfiguration during its life cycle.

Key Points

Following are some key points about Change objects:

• Represented by a special Item Type (EngChange)

• Viewed in the CM Viewer application

• Represented by a Delta, change symbol

• Contain default Folders used to collect all the information about thechange, including a Tasks to Perform folder

• The Tasks to Perform folder contains your assigned tasks to perform,specific to the change object

• The CN Form contains all necessary information about why the productchanged

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 15-3

Page 466: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

Types of Changes

Most companies have different numbering conventions and signatureapproval levels for different types of changes. These are referred to asChange Types.

Some changes are simple and may require only one person to signoff. Otherchanges are more complex and may require approval from multiple people,including external government bodies, suppliers, etc.

Changes Types are created by your Site Administrator using the Admin, Typeapplication, as shown in the following diagram.

You can think of Change Types as templates of the different Change processeswhich can be used at your site.

For the purposes of this training, we’ll use the following Change Types:Change Request, Change Notice, Work Authorization, and Release.

15-4 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 467: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

Descriptions of the Change Types used in this training are provides in thissection:

Some of the Change types described are provided out-of-the-box(OTB) with Teamcenter Engineering and others were created usingthe Type application.

Change Request (CR)

Following are characteristics of the CR Change Type:

• Begins the Change Request Process.

• Change Request is routed to appropriate users defined in the process.

• Provided OTB with Teamcenter Engineering.

Change Notice (CN)

Following are characteristics of the CN Change Type:

• Once the Change Request is complete and authorization has beengranted, a Change Notice is created.

• Alerts all involved users that the change is proceeding.

• Provided OTB with Teamcenter Engineering.

Work Authorization (WA)

Following are characteristics the WA Change Type:

• Provides authority and direction for working on physical items whereresults must conform to specified documents.

• Provided OTB with Teamcenter Engineering.

Release

Following are characteristics the Release Change Type:

• Used for initial release of new parts.

• Custom Type created for this training environment.

Each Change Type has its own unique numbering convention.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 15-5

Page 468: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

Finding Existing Change Objects

To search for existing Change objects, perform an Item search and set theType to EngChange.

Once you have entered the desired search criteria in query form, choose theExecute this query icon to display the search results.

To search for an object that is not owned by you, leave the OwningUser field blank.

15-6 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 469: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

Change Object Folder Structure

Inside the Change object is a built-in folder structure for the change. Thesefolders are used to manage the different types of objects in your Changeprocess.

Key Points

The key folders related to Change Management are the Affected Items,Problem Items, and Solution Items folders, described below:

Affected Items

• An Affected Item is a new Item Revision; it is a new Revision of theProblem Item.

• Can be an assembly or piece part.

• A Release status is attached to the Affected Item(s) during the workflowprocess.

Problem Items

• A Problem Item is the Item Revision which is going to be replaced bythe Affected Item.

Solution Items

• A Solution Item is a new Part or Item Revision that was created as aresult of the change.

• A Release status is attached to the Solution Item(s) during the workflowprocess.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 15-7

Page 470: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

Launching CM Viewer

To launch the CM Viewer application, select an EngChange object orEngChange Revision object and choose the Open icon.

You can also right-click a Change object and choose the SendTo→CM Viewer command to launch the application.

15-8 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 471: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

Working in the CM Viewer Application

You work with Change objects in the CM Viewer application. A Changeobject is routed among the responsible parties as the change progresses.Information may be added to the Change object as the process progresses.

The Affected Item and a Solution Item may be added to the Change object.Links to additional documents such as project plans, test results, and costderivations may be added to the appropriate Change object folder as theinformation is gathered.

Key Points

Following are some key points about the CM Viewer application:

• CM Viewer is an application in the Engineering panel.

• CM Viewer provides all necessary information about why the partchanged.

• CM Viewer allows all actions except PSE.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 15-9

Page 472: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

CM Viewer - Viewer Tab

The Viewer tab displays a table of the Change properties and forms, whichyou can edit and/or complete. Depending on the properties attributed to theChange during its creation, various site-specific forms might be displayed ina series of tabs.

When a task is selected, the Viewer tab displays the task view for the selectedworkflow task. Use this view to perform the selected task just as you wouldin your Inbox.

Key Points

Following are some key points about using the Viewer tab in CM Viewer:

• You can have as many forms as you wish for each Change object type.

• Each form is displayed beneath its own tab.

• Your system administrator attached these forms to this Change typewhen creating the Change object process.

• Any Form type that is defined in the database can be attached to thechange.

• Some forms are provided OTB in Teamcenter Engineering.

15-10 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 473: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

CM Viewer - Properties Tab

The Properties tab in CM Viewer displays similar information to theProperties tab in the Navigator application.

The Properties table displays the properties of the selected object based onthe column preferences defined for the object. In this example, you will seeinformation about the Item Revisions that were released by this Changeobject.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 15-11

Page 474: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

CM Viewer - Process Tab

Selecting a Change object revision and choosing the Process tab displaysthe big picture of the overall workflow process that the Change object isgoing through. The workflow process display is equivalent to the Processview available in your Inbox.

Key Points

Following are key points about viewing the workflow process for the Changeobject:

• The active tasks are designated by a green arrow.

• From the Process tab, you can see where status is applied, EC Pendingand Release, for example. These are system events.

• Do Tasks are Prepare CN and Finalize CN.

• Review Tasks are CCB1 and CCB2.

15-12 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 475: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

CM Viewer - Referencers Tab

The Referencers tab displays other locations where the selected object isreferenced or used.

Where Used Search

Perform a Where Used search on the 1503/001-Wheel to view all assembliesin which the selected assembly is used.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 15-13

Page 476: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

Where Referenced Search

Perform a Where Referenced search on the 1503/001-Wheel to view all objectsthat reference the selected object in your Navigator folder structure.

15-14 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 477: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

CM Viewer - BOM Changes Tab

The BOM Changes tab shows you how the Affected Item was changed(components added or cancelled) by the Change object. The entire BOMstructure for the new Item Revision is condensed into a parts list includingthe following information:

• Added components are represented by a plus symbol (top of the list)

• Cancelled components are represented by a minus symbol (middleof the list)

• Components that remaine the same appear at the bottom of the list

In this example, the 1510/001 Wheel Assy had the 9999-Spacer added andthe 1502-Spacer cancelled. The other components remained the same.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 15-15

Page 478: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

CM Viewer - Effectivity Tab

The purpose of Effectivity is to capture information about when certaincomponents of an assembly will go into production. Effectivity can be set byDate or by Unit Number (and corresponding End Item).

The Effectivity tab displays End Item Effectivity information associated withthe selected Change object Revision or Affected and Solution Items.

The data displayed in the Effectivity tab was populated using theCreate Effectivity dialog.

Choose the Edit button to access the Edit Effectivity dialog. Use this dialog tosearch for End Items and set Unit and Date effectivities.

15-16 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 479: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

Only privileged users can set and change effectivity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 15-17

Page 480: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

Activity: Finding/Interrogating Change objects

In this activity, you will find and view different types of Change objects(Change Request and Change Notice) using the CM Viewer application.

Step 1: Logon to Teamcenter Engineering Portal.

Use the User ID and Password assigned to you by yourInstructor.

Step 2: Find existing Change objects.

Choose Search.

Select Item... from the Query list.

Choose More... to see all fields.

Choose Clear this query form .

Set Type to EngChange.

Choose Execute this query .

The results are displayed. This is a list of all Change objectsin the database.

Step 3: Copy and Paste the Change objects you wish to examine intoyour Home folder.

15-18 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 481: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

Use the CTRL key to select the CN0001-1503/000 andCN0002-1510 Change objects.

Each Change Type has its own unique numberingsystem: CN corresponds with Change Notice.

Choose Copy.

Go to your Home folder in My Navigator.

Close the Search window.

Select your Home folder and choose Paste.

The Change objects appear in your Home folder.

Step 4: Open the CN0001 Change object in the CM Viewer application.

Select the CN0001-1503/000 Change object and choose the

Open icon .

The Change object is displayed in the CM Viewer application.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 15-19

Page 482: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

Expand the Affected Items folder.

Notice that the Affected Item is a new revision, 1503/001, ofthe Wheel. This means there was a problem with the 1503/000Wheel.

Step 5: View the form attached to this Change object.

With the CN0001/A-1503/000 change object selected, choosethe Viewer tab and read the Description of the problem.

15-20 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 483: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

After reviewing the Description, you can see that the revisionchange from 1503/000 to 1503/001 was caused by a Wheelgeometry change (increase in spoke thickness).

Step 6: View the Properties tab data.

Select the Affected Items folder and choose the Properties tabin the CM Viewer application.

Scroll to the right and notice that the Release Status is ECPending.

Step 7: View the Process associated with the Change object.

Select the 1503/001 Wheel Revision and choose the Processtab to view the current state of the workflow Process associatedwith the Change object.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 15-21

Page 484: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

The green arrows (viewable on the screen) indicate the progressionof the Process.

The traffic signal indicates that ’Finalize CN’ is started but notyet complete.

There are no BOM Changes or Effectivity data associatedwith this Change object at this time.

Step 8: Open the CN0002 Change object in the CM Viewer application.

Return to your Home folder in My Navigator.

Select the CN0002-1510 Friction Reduction Change objectand choose Open.

The Change object is displayed in the CM Viewer application.

Choose the Viewer tab and review the Form attached to theChange.

15-22 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 485: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

This Major Change object involved a new revision to the1510/000 Wheel Assy (to 1510/001) with a BOM change(removal of 1502/000-Spacer and addition of 9999/000-Spacer)

Expand the Affected Items folder.

Notice that the Affected Item is a new revision of the WheelAssy, 1510/001.

Expand the Solution Items and Problem Items folders to viewthe associated Items.

Step 9: View the Process associated with the Change object.

Select the Change object and choose the Process tab to viewthe current state of the workflow Process associated with theChange object.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 15-23

Page 486: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

You may wish to drag the Process window to the left to make itbigger. The checkered flags and green arrows indicate that theprocess is complete.

Step 10: View the BOM Changes associated with this Change object.

In the Affected Items folder, select the 1510/001-Wheel Assy.

Choose the BOM Changes tab in the CM Viewer applicationand expand the view folder.

This displays the Added and Cancelled components for the1510/001 Wheel Assy.

The symbol indicates a component Added to the assembly.In this case, the 9999-Spacer.

The symbol indicates a component Cancelled from theassembly. In this case, the 1502-Spacer.

Step 11: View the Effectivity data for this Change object.

Choose the Effectivity tab to view the Effectivity dataassociated with the Change object.

15-24 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 487: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

Review the Effectivity data.

Notice the Unit/Date Range value indicates whenthe Change will take effect and how long it willcontinue, as defined in the Change Notice.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 15-25

Page 488: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

What is Supercedure?

Supercedure is used to track the history of replacement parts. TheSupercedure view is a graphical representation of the replacement history fora given occurrence in a product structure.

Before the supercedure of a component can be viewed, a superceduremust be created which defines the replacement.

15-26 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 489: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

Viewing Supercedure

Supercedure data can be viewed from the PSE. To view Supercedure datafrom PSE:

1. Choose the Show/Hide the data panel icon in PSE to display theData Panel.

When the Data Panel is displayed, there is a Supercedure tab.

2. Choose the Supercedure tab.

3. Select the BOMLine in PSE whose Supercedure data you want to view.

Use the scroll bars in the Supercedure tab to locate and view theSupercedure diagram for the selected BOMLine object.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 15-27

Page 490: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

Key Areas in the Supercedure View

– Expands the Supercedure screen to full size, or decreases the full-sizedscreen to partial size.

– Displays a different Supercedure for the selected component, based onthe selection of a different parent assembly.

– Nodes are automatically laid out by an algorithm that ensures no intersections between the nodes and the Supercedures occur in the display.

– When activated, only a single node can be moved in the display. Wheninactivated, a Supercedure can be moved.

– Displays the Item properties for the selected component in the ItemProperties dialog that displays when you choose this button.

– Displays Change record notes associated with the selected item, if any.

15-28 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 491: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

Activity: Viewing Supercedure Data

In this activity, you will view the Supercedure data for the Spacer Item.

Step 1: Find the 1502-Spacer Item.

The results are displayed in a Find Tab.

Close the Search window.

Step 2: Perform a Where Used on 1502.

Select the 1502-Spacer Item and choose the Referencers tab.

Set the Where pull-down to Used.

Set the Depth set to One Level.

If necessary, double-click the 1502-Spacer Item in theReferencers tab.

The display shows that the 1502 Spacer is used in the1510/000-Wheel Assy.

Step 3: Send the 1510/000-Wheel Assy to PSE.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 15-29

Page 492: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

From the Referencers tab display, right-click on the1510/000-Wheel Assy Item Revision and choose SendTo→PSE.

Step 4: View the Supercedure data for the Spacer Item.

In PSE, click the Show/Hide the data panel icon .

Choose the Supercedure tab.

Select the 1502/000-Spacer component in the BOM structure.

Use the vertical and horizontal scroll bars in the Superceduretab to locate and view the Supercedure diagram for the selectedBOMLine object.

The Supercedure for the 1502/000-Spacer component isdisplayed.

15-30 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 493: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

This graphic shows you that Item 9999-Spacer replaced Item1502-Spacer in the context of the 1510 Wheel Assembly as aresult of Change object MA00001/0-1510/001 and described inChange Notice CN0002/A-1510.

You can mouse-over the Change object and ChangeNotice items, in the display, to view additionalinformation related to the change, as shown in thefollowing diagram.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 15-31

Page 494: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - View

Summary

Change objects are viewed in the CM Viewer application. The CM Viewerapplication collects all the information relative to why a part changed,including who was involved in the change process.

• To find existing Change objects, perform an Item search and set theType to EngChange.

• To launch CM Viewer, select an EngChange Revision object and chooseOpen.

• An Affected Item is a new Item Revision; it is the new Revision of theProblem Item.

• A Solution Item is a new Item Revision that was created as a resultof the change.

• A Problem Item is the Item Revision which is going to be replaced bythe Affected Item.

• Supercedure is used to track the history of replacement parts. TheSupercedure view is a graphical representation of the replacement historyfor a given occurrence in a product structure.

15-32 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 495: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Lesson

16 Change Management - Create

Purpose

The purpose of this lesson is to create a new Change object and follow itthrough the Change Process to its completion.

Objective

Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create a new Change object and submit it to a Change process

• Copy and paste data into the appropriate Change object Folder structure

• Perform Workflow Do and Review tasks

• Set Effectivity

• Make Changes in PSE

• Create Supercedures

• View Supercedures

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-1

Page 496: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Activity: Find and Examine existing Wheel Assy

In this activity, you will find and examine your existing 1510-## WheelAssembly.

Step 1: Change your Group and Role.

Change your Group to high performance and Role to ProductEngineer.

Step 2: Return to your Home folder in My Navigator.

Step 3: Cut the existing Change objects from your Home folder.

Select the existing Change objects in your Home folder and

choose Cut .

Step 4: Using Search, find your 1510-##/000 Wheel Assembly.

Choose Search.

Choose Item... from the Query pull-down menu.

Enter the Item ID for your Wheel Assembly as 1510-##

where ## corresponds to your User ID from thefollowing list:

1510-01 balltr

1510-02 burnstr

1510-03 davistr

1510-04 daytr

1510-05 fondatr

1510-06 grabletr

1510-07 hestontr

1510-08 hopetr

1510-09 kellytr

1510-10 lewistr

1510-11 lorentr

1510-12 monroetr

1510-13 pecktr

1510-14 rogerstr

1510-15 russeltr

1510-16 tracytr

16-2 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 497: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Choose Execute this query .

Close the Search form.

Expand the 1510-##-Wheel Assy Item and Item Revision.

The Flags indicate that these objects are released.

Step 5: Examine the 1510-##/000-Wheel Assy.

Select the UGMASTER ProductVision dataset in the1510-##/000-Wheel Assy.

Choose the Viewer tab.

Choose OK to the View JT Assembly message.

Rotate and view the Wheel Assembly.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-3

Page 498: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Step 6: Examine the part in PSE.

Selecting the BOM object and choose Open .

This launches PSE.

In PSE, you will see the component list for the 1510-##/000Wheel Assy.

Choose the Show/Hide data panel icon .

16-4 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 499: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Make sure the Viewer tab is selected.

Toggle on the check boxes to view specific components of theWheel Assembly.

After checking all the boxes, you may need to choose

the View All icon to see the entire part.

The blue part is the Spacer; it is made out of Nylon.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-5

Page 500: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Activity: Create New Spacer and Wheel Assy Parts

The Product Engineer theorizes that if the spacer is made out of Teflon,rolling friction will be reduced. Therefore, the Product Engineer createsthe following:

• a new Spacer made of Teflon

• a new Revision of the Wheel Assembly

Step 1: Copy and Paste the 1510-##-Wheel Assy into your Home folderin My Navigator.

Return to My Navigator.

Select the Item... Search results tab.

Select the 1510-##-Wheel Assy Item.

Choose Copy .

Select your Home folder and choose Paste .

Expand the 1510-##-Wheel Assy Item and Item Revisionin your Home folder.

Step 2: Open the 1510–##-000 UGMASTER dataset in Unigraphics NX.

Select the 1510-##-000 UGMASTER dataset.

Choose the Start/Open in UG icon .

Unigraphics NX is started.

16-6 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 501: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Choose OK to the Warning dialog.

Close the Information window.

Step 3: Using the Assembly Navigator, change the Displayed Part tothe 1502 Spacer.

Choose the Assembly Navigator icon and pin it in place .

Right-click on the 1502-##/000 component and choose MakeDisplayed Part.

Choose OK to the Warning dialog and the Could Not LockPart dialogs.

The Spacer is displayed.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-7

Page 502: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Step 4: In UG NX, create a new Spacer.

In UG NX, choose File→Save As....

In Save Part File As dialog, double-click the Home folder tomake it the default container.

16-8 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 503: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

In the Part Number field, enter 9999-## where ## correspondsto your User ID from the following list:

9999-01 balltr

9999-02 burnstr

9999-03 davistr

9999-04 daytr

9999-05 fondatr

9999-06 grabletr

9999-07 hestontr

9999-08 hopetr

9999-09 kellytr

9999-10 lewistr

9999-11 lorentr

9999-12 monroetr

9999-13 pecktr

9999-14 rogerstr

9999-15 russeltr

9999-16 tracytr

In the Part Revision field, enter 000.

Leave the Part File Type field set to master.

Choose OK.

The Edit Database dialog displays.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-9

Page 504: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Leave the Part Name set to Spacer.

Leave the Part Description as Spacer-Non Metallic.

Select the Material attribute.

Type CFE in the Value field and press the ENTER key.

Choose OK on the Edit Database Attributes dialog.

The Copy Files for Part dialog displays.

Select the body.gif file and choose OK.

Close the Information window.

Step 5: Activate the Save Teamcenter Vis Data option.

16-10 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 505: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

This step creates DirectModel datasets automatically when yousave your part files.

In Unigraphics NX, choose File→Options→Save Options.

Toggle on the Save Teamcenter Vis Data option.

This option automatically creates DirectModeldatasets in Teamcenter Engineering when you saveyour part file.

Choose OK.

Step 6: Save the 9999-## Spacer part.

In Unigraphics NX, choose Save .

Step 7: Using the Assembly Navigator, display the Parent part for the9999-## Spacer.

In the Assembly Navigator, right-click the 9999-##/000 Spacerand choose Display Parent→1510-##/000.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-11

Page 506: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

The Wheel Assy displays.

Step 8: Make the 1510-##/000 Wheel Assy the Work Part.

Still using the Assembly Navigator, right-click on 1510-##/000and choose Make Work Part.

16-12 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 507: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Step 9: Close the Assembly Navigator.

Unpin and close the Assembly Navigator.

Here is a summary of what you have done so far in this activity:

• Launched UG NX for the 1510-##/000 Wheel Assembly.

• Changed the Displayed Part to the 1502-##/000 Spacer.

• Created a new 9999-##/000 Spacer.

• Activated the Save Teamcenter Vis Data option.

• Saved the Part.

• Changed the Work Part to the 1510-##/000 WheelAssembly.

Next, you will create a new Revision of the Wheel Assembly.

Step 10: Create the new Revision (001) of the 1510-##/000-Wheel Assy.

This new Revision of the Wheel Assembly contains the new9999-##/000 Spacer.

The 1510-##/001 Wheel Assembly is the Affected Item; it changesfrom Revision ’ 000’ to ’ 001’ as a result of the new Change objectthat you will create in the next activity.

In Unigraphics NX, choose File→Save As...

Notice that the Part Number is correctly set to 1510-##.

Choose the Assign button next to Part Revision.

This updates the Revision to 001.

Choose OK.

In the Copy Files for Part dialog, select the body.gif file andchoose OK.

The geometry of the part did not change, so the gif file can becopied into the new Wheel Assembly.

You have just created a new Revision (001) of the 1510-##/000Wheel Assy.

Step 11: Exit Unigraphics NX.

Choose File→Exit.

Choose Yes.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-13

Page 508: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Step 12: Review the results in My Navigator.

In My Navigator, select the 1510-##-Wheel Assy Item andchoose View→Refresh Window.

You will see the new 1510-##/001-Wheel Assy.

Notice that the 000 Revision is released, but the 001 Revisionis not. Also, the 9999-##-Spacer is now in your Home folder.

This concludes the activity.

16-14 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 509: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Creating a Change Object

When the Change Request is complete and authorization has been grantedto proceed with the change, a Change Notice needs to be created. A Changeobject is used to control all changes to a product’s definition and configurationduring its life cycle.

Common Change object Types include the Change Request (CR) and ChangeNotice (CN).

To create a new Change object, select the desired folder and chooseFile→New→Change.... This brings up the Create/Revise Change dialog.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-15

Page 510: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Key Points

Following are some key points about the Create/Revise Change dialog:

• Red triangles indicate required fields.

• The Change Types from which you can choose to create the Change objectare provided in the left panel of the dialog. Common Change Types areChange Request, Change Notice, and Released.

• Change ID is a unique identifier for that Change; no two Changeobjects can have the same Change ID. Assign according to your namingconvention.

• Change Revision ID is a unique revision identifier for the Change objectRevision.

• Change Name is a short, descriptive name for the Change.

• On the More Attributes tab, the Start Process on Create toggle lets yousubmit the change directly to the selected workflow process upon creationof the Change object.

• Information may be added to the Change object as the process progresses.Additional fields of information related to the Change object can beadded to the Base Attributes section of the dialog using the Description,Reason/Description, Cost/Schedule, and Impact tabs.

• Affected Item objects, Solution Item objects, and other objects related tothe Change may be added to the Change object using the Folders tab.

While the Create/Revise Change dialog is open, you can stillinteract with your Navigator window. This allows you to copyand paste parts between the two windows.

You can start a change without having any targets for thechange.

• You can use the Assign to Projects tab if you want to select Projects towhich to assign the Change objects.

16-16 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 511: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Upon entering the necessary information in the Create/Revise Change dialog,and choosing OK, the Change object is created.

Expand the Change object and Change object Revision object to see theChange object folder structure.

Once you have created a Change object, the next thing to do is copy/pastethe appropriate data into the correct location in the Change object folderstructure.

Important! Be sure that you copy and paste the appropriate datainto the correct Change object folders so Teamcenter Engineeringmanages the data correctly during the change process.

The Change object releases the Item Revisions in the AffectedItems and Solution Items folders but not the Problem Items folders.The Problem Item, in most cases, has already been released.

It is very important that you copy and paste Item Revisions (notItems!) into the appropriate folder structure.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-17

Page 512: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Activity: Creating a Change Notice

In this activity, you will create a Change Notice (CN) to begin the changeprocess. The desired outcome of the Change Notice is to release the1510-##/001 Wheel Assy and the new 9999-##/000 Spacer.

Step 1: Create a New Change object (CN) to initiate the Change Process.

Select your Home folder.

Choose File→New→Change....

The Create/Revise Change dialog displays.

Select CN for Change Type.

Choose the Assign button next to Change ID.

This assigns the Change ID and the Change Revision ID.

Enter the Change Name: 6505 Model Year Updates.

16-18 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 513: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Choose the More Attributes tab.

Toggle on Start Process on Create.

The above action is important! Toggling this switchOn automatically identifies the correspondingChange Process as CMES Change Notice.

Choose the Description tab.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-19

Page 514: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Enter the Change Description: This CN creates 1510/001same as 1510/000 except replacing 1502 nylon spacer with9999 teflon spacer.

Choose OK.

The new Change object appears in your Home folder.

Check your Newstuff folder if you don’t see theChange object.

Expand the new EngChange object and EngChange Revision.

16-20 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 515: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

At this point, there is nothing in the Affected, Problem, orSolution Items folders. You will add the appropriate datato these folders.

Expand the Tasks to Perform Folder.

Notice there is a Prepare CN task. This outlines the tasksyou need to perform.

Select the Prepare CN task and choose the Viewer tab toreview the Task Instructions.

Step 2: Your next task is to “Add Basis CR (Revision) to Reference ItemsFolder.” To do this, you need to find the CR0002/A-6505 ChangeRequest and paste it into the Reference Items folder. This is theChange Request on which this Change Notice is being based.

Choose Search.

Choose the Item... query from the Query drop-down menu.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-21

Page 516: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Choose Clear this query to clear the Search form.

Set Type to EngChange.

Enter CR* in the Item ID field.

Choose Execute this query .

Close the Search form.

Expand the CR0002-6505 MY2003 Updates EngChange objectto see the EngChange Revision.

Select the CR0002/A-6505 MY2003 Updates EngChange

Revision and choose Copy .

Be sure to copy the EngChange Revision and notthe EngChange Item.

Select your Home folder.

Highlight the Reference Items folder and choose Paste .

16-22 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 517: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Your next task is to add the Affected, Problem, and SolutionItem Revisions to the appropriate folders.

Step 3: Copy and paste the Problem Item into the Problem Items folder.

The Problem Item is the object for which you must develop asolution.

In this case, the goal is to reduce rolling friction of the 1510-##/000Wheel Assy. Therefore, the 1510-##/000 Wheel Assy is theProblem Item.

Choose the Properties tab in My Navigator.

Select your 1510-##/000-Wheel Assy Item Revision andchoose Copy.

Select the Problem Items folder in the CN#### ChangeRevision and choose Paste.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-23

Page 518: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Notice that the Problem Item is already released.

Step 4: Copy and paste the Affected Item Revision(s) into the AffectedItems folder.

Recall that the Affected Item is the object being changed, in thiscase, the new 1510-##/001 Wheel Assy.

Select the 1510-##/001 Wheel Assy and choose Copy.

Select the Affected Items folder in the CN#### ChangeRevision and choose Paste.

Step 5: Copy and Paste the Solution Item into the Solution Items folder.

The 9999-##/000-Spacer is the Solution Item; it is the part beingadded to the Wheel Assembly.

Under different circumstances, there could be severalnew parts added to the assembly.

Copy and Paste the 9999-##/000-Spacer Item Revision intothe Solution Items folder in the CN#### Change Revision.

Now you have copied all necessary data into the appropriateChange object folder structure.

16-24 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 519: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Step 6: Return to the Prepare CN task in your Tasks to Perform folder.

Select the Prepare CN task.

Choose the Viewer tab.

Your next task is to “Fill in the required form data.”

Step 7: Fill in the CN Form.

Select the CN Form and choose the Viewer tab.

The Form displays.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-25

Page 520: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Notice that the Basis for this CN field is filled in automatically.This comes from the data in the Reference Items folder(CR002/A-6505 MY2003 Updates).

In the Special Instructions field, enter: 9999 Spacer supercedes1502 Spacer with two-way interchangeability.

Choose Apply.

Step 8: Finish the Prepare CN Task.

With the Viewer tab still selected, select the Prepare CN taskin the Tasks to Perform folder.

Choose Done and Apply.

16-26 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 521: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Once the Prepare CN task is complete, a preliminarystatus called EC Pending is applied to the data in theAffected Items and Solution Items folders. Thislets everyone know that these objects are currentlyin a change process (which is not complete, yet).

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-27

Page 522: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Activity: Select the Signoff Team for CCB1

In this activity, the Product Engineer launches the CM Viewer applicationand selects the signoff team.

Step 1: Launch CM Viewer.

Select your CN####/A-6505 Model Year Updates EngChange

Revision and choose Open .

This launches the CM Viewer application.

Choose the Viewer tab.

Expand the Tasks to Perform folder.

Step 2: View the Process associated with the Change.

To check where you are in the process, choose the Process tab.

The green arrows show the progression of the process.

16-28 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 523: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Now that the Prepare CN task is complete, the EC PendingStatus has been applied by the system. In the Tasks toPerform folder, you will see the select-signoff-team task.

Step 3: Select the signoff team.

Select the select-signoff-team task in the Tasks to Performfolder.

Make sure Task View is toggled on.

Select the config_mgt/CCB Chairman/1 profile.

Select your User name from the User drop-down list.

Click the + sign.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-29

Page 524: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Choose Apply.

Your user name is added to the signoff team as theconfig_mgt/CCB Chairman.

The select-signoff-team task is replaced by theperform-signoffs task. You will perform the signoff in thenext activity.

Step 4: Exit Teamcenter Engineering.

Choose the File→Exit.

Choose Yes.

This concludes the activity.

16-30 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 525: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Activity: Perform Tasks for CCB1

The CCB Chairman is notified (via e-mail) that a task has been assigned toperform. The CCB Chairman logs into Teamcenter Engineering to reviewthe change to see if everything is done correctly.

In this activity, the Config_Mgt/CCB Chairman completes the task for theCCB1 level of the CMES Change Notice process.

Step 1: Start Teamcenter Engineering and Login to My Navigator.

Step 2: Change your Group and Role.

Change your Group to config_mgt and Role to CCB Chairman.

The CCB Chairman is seeing this information for the first time.First, all the information about the change must be reviewed.

Step 3: Open the Inbox .

Step 4: Review all the information about the change.

Expand your Tasks to Perform folder.

Expand the perform-signoffs task.

Expand the Targets list.

Step 5: Launch CM Viewer to review the change information.

Select the EngChange Revision object, CN####/A-6505 ModelYear Updates.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-31

Page 526: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Choose Open .

This launches the CM Viewer application.

Expand the Affected Items, Solution Items, ProblemItems and Reference Items folders and review all theinformation about the change.

When you are satisfied that everything looks correct, proceedto Step 6 to perform the signoff.

Step 6: Perform signoffs.

Expand the Tasks to Perform folder.

Select the perform-signoffs task.

Choose the Viewer tab and choose the Task View toggle.

16-32 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 527: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

You can also perform the signoff in the Process tab ofthe CM Viewer application.

Select the No Decision link.

Choose Approve.

Enter your comments.

Choose OK.

Notice that the task in the Tasks to Perform folder changesto Finalize CN.

Select the Finalize CN task and review the Task Instructions.

Select the CN####/A Change object and choose the Process tab.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-33

Page 528: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

The green arrow points to Finalize CN.

This concludes the activity.

16-34 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 529: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

What are Supercedures?

The Supercedure window displays the additions and cancellations to theAffected Item Revision. Supercedures allow you to see ’what replaced what’.

Creating Supercedures

• From the CM Viewer application, select the Affected Item Revision (whoseSupercedure you wish to view).

• Right-click the Affected Item Revision and select Send To→ PSE fromthe pop-up menu.

• Choose the Split the panels... icon .

This is essentially doing a BOM Compare, which shows you what parts wereadded and what parts were cancelled. The 1510-#/001-Wheel Assy is theAffected Item (new Item Revision).

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-35

Page 530: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

• Select the 9999-#/000 Spacer and the 1502-#/000-Spacer.

• With both components selected, choose the Create a new Supercedure

icon .

Expand the contents of the Supercedures folder (and the Adds and Cancelsfolders) in the lower pane of the Supercedure Definition window.

16-36 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 531: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Activity: Finalize the Change

In this activity, the Product Engineer performs the tasks to Finalize theChange. This includes finalizing the BOM change data and setting Effectivity.

Step 1: Change your Group and Role.

Change your Group to high performance and role to ProductEngineer.

Step 2: Perform the Finalize CN task.

Expand the Tasks to Perform folder.

Select the Finalize CN task.

Since the Process tab was already selected, you cansee that the Task Instructions can be viewed in theProcess tab as well as the Viewer tab, with TaskView toggled on.

Review the task instructions.

Step 3: Finalize BOM Change data by saving the BOM in PSE.

Expand the Affected Items folder.

Right-click the 1510-##/001 Wheel Assy Item Revision andchoose Send To→PSE.

Choose File→Save from the PSE pull-down menu.

This brings up the Supercedure Definition window.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-37

Page 532: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

• 1510-##/001-Wheel Assy is the Affected Item (new ItemRevision)

• 9999-##/000-Spacer (blue item) is the Item being added

• 1502-##/000-Spacer (red item) is the Item being cancelled

Step 4: Create a new Supercedure.

Highlight the 9999-##/000 Spacer and the1502-##/000-Spacer.

With both components selected, choose the Create a new

Supercedure icon.

In the lower panel of the Supersedure Definition window,expand the contents of the Supercedures folder and the Addsand Cancels folders.

16-38 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 533: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

The Item symbol with a + sign represents the addedcomponent. The Item symbol with a – sign representsthe componenet being cancelled.

Choose the Split the panels ... icon to close theSupercedure Definition window and return to PSE.

Step 5: View the Supercedure.

In PSE, choose the Show/Hide the data panel icon.

Choose the Supercedure tab.

Select the 9999-##/000-Spacer component in the BOMstructure.

Use the vertical and horizontal scroll bars to locate thediagram of the Supercedure for the Spacer component.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-39

Page 534: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

This graphic shows that Item 9999-##-Spacer replaced Item1502-##-Spacer as a result of Change CN####/A-6505 ModelYear Updates.

Step 6: View the BOM Changes for the Affected Item.

The BOM Change window shows you how the Affected Item waschanged by the EC.

Return to the CM Viewer application.

In the Affected Items folder, select the 1510-##/001-WheelAssy.

Choose the BOM Changes tab.

Expand the view folder.

16-40 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 535: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Step 7: Establish starting Effectivity for the 1510-##/000 relative to aspecific End Item ( 6505-## Racing Skate Assy).

Highlight the CN####/A Change Revision and choose theEffectivity tab in CM Viewer.

Click anywhere on the blue EC Pending row and choose theEdit button.

The Create Effectivity dialog displays.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-41

Page 536: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Choose the Open an object by Name icon next to theEnd Item field.

The Open by Name dialog appears.

In the ID field, enter 6505-## and choose the Find button.

Use the # # that corresponds with your User ID.

16-42 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 537: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Double-click on the resulting 6505-##-Skate Assy, RacingItem in the Object column of the Open by Name dialog.

Choose the Dates radio button for Effectivity Range.

For From Date, use the calender to pick the desired date (picka date that is two months after today).

Choose the Set Date button beneath the calender.

This tells us when the new assembly will go into production.

For To Date, choose the to Up button.

Do not choose the Protected toggle.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-43

Page 538: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Choose OK.

Step 8: Perform the Signoff for Finalize CN.

Choose the Finalize CN task.

Choose the Viewer tab and make sure you are looking at theTask View.

16-44 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 539: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Choose Done.

Choose Apply.

The task listed in the Tasks to Perform folder changes toselect-signoff-team.

Select the CN####/A-6505 EngChange Revision object.

Choose the Process tab to see where you are in the changeprocess.

The green arrows show the progression of the process.

Step 9: Select the signoff team for CCB2.

Select the select-signoff-team task.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-45

Page 540: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Select config_mgt/CCB_Chairman/1.

Select your User name from the User drop-down list.

Click the + sign.

Choose Apply.

It is important that you choose Apply to indicate youare done selecting the signoff team.

The select-signoff-team task is replaced by theperform-signoffs task. You will perform the signoff in thenext activity.

Step 10: Exit Teamcenter Engineering.

ChooseFile→ Exit.

Choose Yes.

This concludes the activity.

16-46 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 541: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Activity: Perform Signoff for CCB2

With the Finalize CN task complete, the process moves on to CCB2 for finalreview.

The CCB Chairman receives another e-mail message stating there is anassigned task to perform.

In this activity, the Config_Mgt/CCB Chairman logs into TeamcenterEngineering to complete the task for the CCB2 level of the CMES ChangeNotice process by performing the signoffs.

Step 1: Start Teamcenter Engineering and Login to My Navigator.

Step 2: Change your Group to config_mgt and your Role to CCBChairman.

Step 3: Perform the Signoff.

Open the Inbox .

Expand your Tasks to Perform folder.

Expand the perform-signoffs task.

Expand the Targets list.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-47

Page 542: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Select the CN####/A-6505 Model Year Updates EngChangeRevision object and choose Open.

This launches the CM Viewer application so that you canview the Change data.

Step 4: View the Process.

Choose the Process tab to view the Process associated withthe Change.

The green arrow shows you where you are in the process,CCB2. This is the last signoff in the process.

Step 5: View the Forms.

16-48 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 543: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Choose the Viewer tab to view the CN Form.

Step 6: What is the Solution Item?

Expand the Solution Items folder.

You will see the 9999-##/000-Spacer Item Revision.

Step 7: What is the Affected Item? What is the Change being written for?

Expand the Affected Items folder to find out.

Step 8: How is the Affected Item being changed?

Select the 1510-##/001 Wheel Assy and choose the BOMChanges tab.

Expand the view folder to see the added and cancelledcomponents.

Step 9: When will the new Spacer go into Production?

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-49

Page 544: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Select the 9999-## Spacer in the Solution Items folder andchoose the Effectivity tab.

This shows you when the Spacer will go into Production.

Step 10: Perform the Signoff.

When you are satisfied with all the data, perform the signoff.

Expand the Tasks to Perform folder.

Select the perform-signoffs task.

Choose the Viewer tab and the Task View toggle.

Select the No Decision link in the Decision column.

Choose Approve and enter any comments.

16-50 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 545: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Choose the OK button.

Once you submit final approval, the Change is complete.The data in the Affected Items and Solution Items foldersis Released.

Step 11: CCB Chairman logs out of Teamcenter Engineering.

Choose File→Exit.

Choose Yes.

This concludes the activity.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-51

Page 546: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Activity: Review Data Created From Navigator

At the conclusion of CCB2, final status of Released is applied to the data.The data in the Affected Items and Solution Items folders is released.

In this activity, you will review the results of the completed Change on thedata.

Step 1: Start Teamcenter Engineering and Login to My Navigator.

Step 2: Expand the CN####/A EngChange and EngChange Revisionobjects.

Step 3: Expand the Affected, Problem and Solution Items folders.

Notice the Flags indicating the data is released.

Select the Affected Items and Solution Items folders and lookat the Release Status column in the Properties table to verifythat the Item Revisions are Released.

16-52 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 547: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Step 4: Where is the new 1510-##/001-Wheel Assy used?

Select the 1510-##/001-Wheel Assy and choose theReferencers tab.

Set the Where pull-down to Used.

Set the Depth pull-down to One Level.

You may need to double-click the 1510-##/001-WheelAssy to expand the view.

The display shows that the new 1510-##/001 Wheel Assy isused in the existing 2505-##/000-Frame Assy.

Notice that we didn’t have to write a Change for the2505-##/000-Frame Assy to get it to recognize that the1510-##/001 exists.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-53

Page 548: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

You can set the Where-Used Depth to All Levels tosee all assemblies that use it.

Step 5: Examine the 2505 in PSE.

In the Referencers view, right-click the 2505-##/000 andchoose Send To→ PSE.

The PSE window for the 2505-##/000 Frame Assy is loaded.

Notice the 1510-##/001 Wheel Assy is displayed.

Why? Because the Revision Rule is currently set to Latest and001 is the revision configured by that revision rule.

Step 6: Change the Revision Rule to Released; Config by Date and viewthe results.

Choose the Revision Rule icon (or Tools→RevisionRule→View/Set Current).

Select Released; Config by Date and choose OK.

Which revision of the 1510-## Wheel Assy is loaded now?

Step 7: Change the Revision Rule to see which Revision of the1510-##-Wheel Assy is in effect on a specific date.

Choose Tools→Revision Rule→Set Date/Unit/End Item....

16-54 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 549: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Deselect the use Today toggle.

In the Effective Date field, set a date that corresponds to threemonths after today.

Choose the Open by Name icon next to the End Item field.

The Open by Name dialog displays.

Enter 6505-## in the ID field.

Choose the Find button.

In the Object column, double-click on the Item that is found.

Choose OK.

Which revision configures?

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-55

Page 550: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

The 001 revision should configure.

This concludes the activity.

16-56 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 551: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Change Management - Create

Summary

To create a new Change object, choose File→New→Change....

• Expand the EngChange Revision object to see the Change object folderstructure.

• After creating a Change object, copy/paste the appropriate data into thecorrect Change object folder structure.

• Important! Be sure that you copy and paste the appropriate data intothe correct Change object folders so Teamcenter Engineering managesthe data correctly during the change process.

• The Change object releases Item Revisions in the Affected Items andSolution Items folders, not the Problem Items folders. The Problem Item,in most cases, has already been released.

• It is very important that you copy and paste Item Revisions (not Items!)into the appropriate folder structure.

• The Supercedure window displays the additions and cancellations tothe Affected Item Revision.

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management 16-57

Page 552: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9
Page 553: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Index

A

Alternate ComponentsAlternate Occurrences . . . . . . . . 11-32

altrep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55Altreps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56Application Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Approving a Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7Automated Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25

B

BOM View Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4BOMView revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28BOMView Revision Object . . . . . . . . 7-3BOMViews and BOMView Revisions

BOMView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27Building Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

using Add...using Create Item

(Revision) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4using Copy and Paste

using Create Item(Revision) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

using Paste...using Create Item

(Revision) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

C

Change Object Folder Structure . . . 15-7Affected Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7Problem Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7Solution Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7

Changing Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Changing your Group and RoleSetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

CM ViewerECM Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9

BOM Changes Tab . . . . . . . 15-15

Effectivity Tab . . . . . . . . . . 15-16Process Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12Properties Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11Referencers Tab . . . . . . . . . 15-13Viewer Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10

Comparing Search Results . . . . . . . 4-12Components

add existing partadd existing part . . . . . . . . . 1-44

Concurrent Engineering . . . . . . . . . 1-19Configuring using Revision Rules . . . 8-4Course Description

Introductionclass overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Course Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Create

Assemblies in NX ManagerUnigraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42

New Part in NX ManagerUnigraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Creating 2D Visualization Data . . . . 6-8Creating 3D Visualization Data . . . . 6-2Creating a Change Object . . . . . . 16-15Creating Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Creating Items from TeamcenterEngineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Creating Markup Data from 2DVisualization Data . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15

Creating Markup Data from 3DVisualization Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7

Creating Variant Data . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

D

Datasetversion limit . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24, 6-17

Dataset Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Datasets

dataset object behavior

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management Index-1

Page 554: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Index

what is . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9named references . . . . . . . . . 5-22, 6-7versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23, 6-16

Delegating Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22Deleting Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38Dialogs

SaveAs Non Master Part Files . . 2-14

E

Explicit Check-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10

F

Findby Part Number in NX Manager

Unigraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40Folder

opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15, 3-35Folder Object Behavior . . . . . . . . . 3-35

What are Folders? . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Folders

FoldersCreate a Folder in

Unigraphics . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Following a Process . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

process viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14view audit file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

G

Group and Role Settings . . . . . . . . 3-18verifying/changing your Group/Role

why have users, groups androles? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

why have users, groups androles? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

H

How do I Find an Existing Change Object?Finding an Existing Change

Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6How do I know I have a Task to Perform?

Launching Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5How to Use this Manual . . . . . . . . . . 12

I

Initiating a Process . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4Item

Item ID (property)general description of . . . . . . . 4-2

Item and Item Revision Relations . . 5-10Item Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Item Data Consumption while BOMBrowsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

Item Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Item Revision Configuration usingRevision Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Item Revision Contents . . . . . . . . . 4-25Item Revision Release Status . . . . . 4-17Item Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Item Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

L

Launching CM ViewerLaunching ECM Viewer . . . . . . . 15-8

Launching PSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

M

Manifestation Relations . . . . . . . . . 1-56manifestations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55Markup Data

when can it be created? . . . . . . . 14-22who can create a markup? . . . . . 14-23

Master GeometryAdd Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56

Master Model Approach . . . . . . . . . 1-20Modifying Object References

cut, copy, append, paste . . . . . . . 3-53Modifying Product StructureColumns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Modifying Properties Columns inNavigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Moving Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37My Navigator Overview . . . . . . . . . 3-13

N

Named References . . . . . . . . . . 5-22, 6-7

Index-2 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 555: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Index

O

On-line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31On-Line Help

NX Manager Unigraphics . . . . . . 1-18Open the Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5Opening Multiple Product Structures inPSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

Out of Office Assistant . . . . . . . . . 13-24Overview of Workflow . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

P

Part Export Directories . . . . . . . . . . 6-5storing dependent files in NX Manager

Unigraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Part Selection

FoldersDefault Folders . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Part Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Creating Folders in NX Manager

Unigraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16File- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Folders in NX Manager

Unigraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Performing a General Query . . . . . 3-39Performing a Review Task . . . . . . . 13-6Populating the Item with Data . . . . . 5-7Portal Overview

Launching Applications . . . . . . . 3-10Printing Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38Printing the BOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Process View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5Product Data Management

Why use PDM?what is PDM? . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

product structure editor (PSE)save as... BOMView revision . . . . 11-28

Product Structure Editor (PSE) . . . . 7-2Protecting Data using Check-Out

Explicit Check-Out from NX ManagerUnigraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

PSEhow does it work? . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26multiple views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28variant conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

PSE Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

R

Reference Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Referencing Database Objects . . . . 3-52Refreshing the Query Form . . . . . . 3-44Rejecting a Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7Renaming Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37Renaming Search Results . . . . . . . 3-42Reports

Working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33Revise for non-CAD Item . . . . . . . . 5-29

S

SaveAs and Revise from TeamcenterEngineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

SaveAs for non-CAD Item . . . . . . . 5-28SaveAs to Create New Part . . . . . . . 2-3Searching for Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Searching the database

where referenced feature . . . . . . . 9-2Selecting the Signoff Team . . . . . . . 12-7Specification Relations . . . . . . . . . . 1-56specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55Starting Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2States of Release

Stages of Release . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3Student Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . 12Supercedure View . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28Supercedures

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-35

T

Target Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Task Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Task View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

decision tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Types of Changes

Change Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4

U

User Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Using Load Options

Load Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Using On-line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Using Resource Pools . . . . . . . . . . 13-21

©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management Index-3

Page 556: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Index

Using SaveAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

V

Variant Data Location . . . . . . . . . . 11-6Variant Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2Variant Rules

setting and saving . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18Viewing Objects from SearchResults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Viewing Objects from your HomeFolder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Viewing Supercedure data . . . . . . 15-26

W

What are Folders? . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33What are Items?

What are Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Item contents . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Item Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Item Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3searching for Items . . . . . . . . 4-4

What are Supercedures? . . . . . . . 16-35What is a Change Object? . . . . . . . 15-3What is a Dataset? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9What is Change Management? . . . . 15-2What is NX Manager Unigraphics

What is NX ManagerUnigraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Where is the Visualization Data? . . 14-2Where Referenced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Where Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Working in the CM ViewerApplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9

Working with FoldersHome, Newstuff and Mailbox

Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34Working with the Inbox . . . . . . . . . 12-6

Index-4 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management ©UGS PLM Solutions, All Rights Reserved MT14330

Page 557: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Reference Chart Tear Outs

These tear out reference charts are provided for your convenience.

Page 558: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9
Page 559: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management Student Profile

Name ________________________________________________ Date _____________________

Employer _______________________________________________________________________

U.S. Citizen? Yes / No

When is your planned departure time? ________ am/pm

Please answer the following questions as honestly as you can. We areconcerned about providing training that meets your needs. If you haveany additional comments please write them on the back of this form.

1. Job title: _______________________________________________________________________

2. Current responsibilities: _________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

3. How long have you held these responsibilities? Years ______

4. How long have you been working with CAD/CAM & PDM systems? Years ______

5. What other PDM systems are you familiar with? __________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

6. What other CAD/CAM systems are you familiar with? _____________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

7. Are you currently using TcEng _______ Version _______ Hours per week? ______

8. Are you currently using Unigraphics? _______ Version _______ Hours per week? ______

9. What are the primary uses of TcEng at your site? __________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

10. What do you model in your Unigraphics part files (castings, assemblies, etc.)?

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

Page 560: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

11. Please list other completed CAD/CAM or PDM courses and the provider includingUnigraphics CBT and CAST:

Course Provider

12. Please check the box that best describes your current skill level in the variousTcEng/Unigraphics disciplines listed below.

none novice intermediate advanced future

Unigraphics User

NX Manager User

TcEng User

TcEng System Admin

TcEng ApplicationAdmin

TcEng Development(ITK)

Additional Comments: _____________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

Page 561: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

V9.0 Teamcenter Engineering Product Data Management Course Agenda

Day 1 ______ MorningIntroductionLesson 1

Course OverviewCAD Integration - Creating New Data

AfternoonLesson 2Lesson 3

CAD Integration - Revising Existing DataThe Teamcenter Engineering Portal Interface

Day 2 ______ MorningLesson 4Lesson 5

Finding and Viewing DataCreating Items in Teamcenter Engineering

AfternoonLesson 6

Lesson 7

CAD Integration - Visualizationand Dataset Management

Viewing Product Structure with PSE

Day 3 ______ MorningLesson 8Lesson 9

Product Structure - CAD ViewWhere Used and Where Referenced

AfternoonLesson 10Lesson 11

Product Structure - Create/ExtendProduct Structure - Advanced

Day 4 ______ MorningLesson 12Lesson 13

Workflow - View and InitiateReviewing and Dispositioning Data

AfternoonLesson 14

Lesson 15

Visualization Data MarkupUsing Portal Visualization

Change Management - View

Day 5 ______ MorningLesson 16 Change Management - Create

AfternoonQuestion and AnswerHands-On

Page 562: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9
Page 563: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Rev-2/6/04-glk

Evaluation – Delivery

Course: Dates thru

Please share your opinion in all of the following sections with a “check” in the appropriate box:

Instructor:

If there were 2 instructors, please evaluate the 2nd instructor with “X’s”

Instructor: 1. …clearly explained the course objectives 2. …was knowledgeable about the subject 3. …answered my questions appropriately 4. … encouraged questions in class 5. …was well spoken and a good communicator 6. …was well prepared to deliver the course 7. …made good use of the training time 8. …conducted themselves professionally 9. …used examples relevant to the course and audience 10. …provided enough time to complete the exercises 11. …used review and summary to emphasize important information 12. …did all they could to help the class meet the course objectives

Comments on overall impression of instructor(s):

Overall impression of instructor(s) Poor Excellent Suggestions for improvement of course delivery:

What you liked best about the course delivery:

Class Logistics: 1. The training facilities were comfortable, clean, and provided a good learning

environment 2. The computer equipment was reliable 3. The software performed properly 4. The overhead projection unit was clear and working properly 5. The registration and confirmation process was efficient

Hotels: (We try to leverage this information to better accommodate our customers) 1. Name of the hotel Best hotel I’ve stayed at

2. Was this hotel recommended during your registration process? YES NO

3. Problem? (brief description)

SEE BACK

STR

ON

GL

Y

DIS

AG

RE

E

DIS

AG

RE

E

SOM

EW

HA

T

DIS

AG

RE

E

SOM

EW

HA

T

AG

RE

E

AG

RE

E

STR

ON

GL

Y

AG

RE

E

Page 564: TCEng Data-Management Student Guide V9

Rev-2/6/04-glk

Material: 1. The training material supported the course and lesson objectives 2. The training material contained all topics needed to complete the projects 3. The training material provided clear and descriptive directions 4. The training material was easy to read and understand 5. The course flowed in a logical and meaningful manner 6. How appropriate was the length of the course relative to the material? Too short Too long Just right

Comments on Course and Material:

Overall impression of course Poor Excellent

Student:

1. I met the prerequisites for the class (I had the skills I needed) 2. My objectives were consistent with the course objectives 3. I will be able to use the skills I have learned on my job 4. My expectations for this course were met 5. I am confident that with practice I will become proficient

Name (optional): Location/room

Please “check” this box if you would like your comments featured in our training publications. (Your name is required at the bottom of this form)

Please “check” this box if you would like to receive more information on our other courses and services. (Your name is required at the bottom of this form)

Thank you for your business. We hope to continue to provide your training and personal development for the future.

STR

ON

GL

Y

DIS

AG

RE

E

DIS

AG

RE

E

SOM

EW

HA

T

DIS

AG

RE

E

SOM

EW

HA

T

AG

RE

E

AG

RE

E

STR

ON

GL

Y

AG

RE

E